(1,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 11
Foreword
Foreword
SFWAA
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARU
CORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next
owner will need the information found herein.
SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN
“SUBARU” and the six-star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.
*
C
Copyright 2018 SUBARU CORPORATION
(2,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 11
(3,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 11
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) Legacy
2) Outback
(2,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
(3,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S00
Warranties
S00AA
& Warranties for U.S.A.
S00AA01
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of
America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Sys-
tems Warranties
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet.” Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
S00AA05
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet.”
Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties except for U.S.A.
and Canada
S00AA06
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Read these warranties carefully.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
S00AB
& Using your Owner’s Manual
S00AB01
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed of fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-
bags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and how
to use the instruments and other switches.
– CONTINUED –
1
0
(4,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you about your audio
system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need to
take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
For models with EyeSight system:
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement
for the EyeSight system.
& Safety warnings
S00AB02
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to you
or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understanding
of how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
2
(5,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Safety symbol
S00AB03
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “Do
not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
& Abbreviation list
S00AB04
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
AWD All-wheel drive
BSD Blind Spot Detection
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
INT Intermittent
Abbreviation Meaning
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LCA Lane Change Assist
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
OBD On-board diagnostics
RAB Reverse Automatic Braking
RCTA Rear Cross Traffic Alert
RON Research octane number
SRH
Steering Responsive Head-
light
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
3
0
(6,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Vehicle symbols
S00AC
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F24.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions care-
fully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
Safety precautions when
driving
S00AD
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
S00AD01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
does not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. In combination
with the seatbelts, it offers the
best combined protection in case
of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit
upright and well back in the seat
as far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control and the front
passenger should move the seat
as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-16.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem airbag)” F1-42.
4
(7,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Child safety
S00AD02
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, infants
and small children should always
be placed in the REAR seat in an
infant or child restraint system
which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. If
a child is too big for a child
restraint system, the child should
sit in the REAR seat and be
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position whenever
a child rides in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opened the
door and fell out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” F2-34.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-35.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
the temperature in a closed vehi-
cle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or pos-
sibly fatal injuries.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-16.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-27.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
– CONTINUED –
5
0
(8,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
tem airbag)” F1-42.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
S00AD03
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
S00AD04
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking – even if you drink just a
little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent
causes of accidents. Since alcohol affects
all people differently, you may have con-
sumed too much alcohol to drive safely
even if the level of alcohol in your blood is
below the legal limit. The safest thing you
can do is never drink and drive. However if
you have no choice but to drive, stop
drinking and sober up completely before
getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
S00AD05
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or fatal
accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
6
(9,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
after taking any medications that can make
you drowsy or otherwise affect your ability
to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you
have a medical condition that requires you
to take drugs, please consult with your
doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
S00AD06
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tired or sleepy, your, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but instead
find a safe place to rest if you are tired or
sleepy. On long trips, you should make
periodic rest stops to refresh yourself
before continuing on your journey. When
possible, you should share the driving with
others.
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
S00AD08
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and park in a safe place before using
your phone. In some States/Pro-
vinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Modification of your vehicle
S00AD07
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Driving with pets
S00AD10
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can be
hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling harness
which can be secured to the rear seat with
a seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a
seatbelt through the carrier’s handle.
Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the
– CONTINUED –
7
0
(10,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
front passenger’s seat. For further infor-
mation, consult your veterinarian, local
animal protection society or pet shop.
& Tire pressures
S00AD11
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire (including the spare) at
least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-22.
& Attaching accessories
S00AD15
WARNING
. Do not attach any accessories,
labels or stickers (other than
properly placed inspection stick-
ers) to the windshield. Such
items may obstruct your view.
. If it is necessary to attach an
accessory (such as an electronic
toll collection (ETC) device or
security pass) to the windshield,
consult your SUBARU dealer for
details on the proper location.
General information
S00AK
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
S00AK03
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the vehicle
S00AK01
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the engine is turned off. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
This noise is caused by the operation of
the fuel evaporation leakage checking
system and the operation is normal.
The noise will stop after approximately
15 minutes.
& Event data recorder
S00AK04
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
8
(11,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
9
0
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
(14,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Illustrated index
S00AE
& Exterior
S00AE01
1) Engine hood (page 11-8)
2) Headlight (page 3-49)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-40)
4) Front wiper (page 3-61)
5) Moonroof (page 2-48)
6) Roof rail with integrated crossbars and
rope hook (page 8-15)
7) Door locks (page 2-6)
8) Outside mirrors (page 3-85)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-25)
10) Flat tires (page 9-5)
11) Fog light (page 3-59)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)
13) Towing hook (Outback) (page 9-15)
12
(15,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Rear window defogger (page 3-64)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-4)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-34)
4) Towing hook (page 9-15)
5) Trunk lid (page 2-38)
6) Rear wiper (page 3-63)
7) Rear gate (page 2-41)
8) Replacing bulbs (page 11-40)
9) Tie-down holes (page 9-15)
– CONTINUED –
13
0
(17,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Select lever (page 7-23)
2) Climate control (page 4-1)
3) Audio*/Navigation system*
4) Glove box (page 6-6)
5) Accessory power outlet (page 6-9)
6) Cup holder (page 6-7)
7) Electronic parking brake switch (page 7-
40)
8) X-MODE switch (page 7-36)
9) Hill Holder switch (page 7-43)
10) Rear seat heater switch (page 1-10)
11) USB power supply (page 6-11)
*: For details about how to use the audio
and navigation system (if equipped),
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
– CONTINUED –
15
0
(18,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU
STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-
ual supplement for SUBARU STARLINK
Safety and Security.
16
(19,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Instrument panel
S00AE03
1) Power windows (page 2-35)
2) Remote control mirror switch (page 3-85)
3) Combination meter (page 3-8)
4) Audio*/Navigation system*
5) Hazard warning flasher switch (page 3-8)
6) Seat heater switch (page 1-9)
7) Climate control (page 4-1)
8) Memory switch for power rear gate (page
2-45)
9) Illumination brightness control dial (page
3-59)
10) Power rear gate switch (page 2-42)/
Trunk lid opener switch (page 2-39)
11) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-56)
12) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-34)
13) Hood lock release knob (page 11-8)
*: For details about how to use the audio
and navigation system (if equipped),
refer to the separate navigation/audio
Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
For details about the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
– CONTINUED –
17
0
(20,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Steering wheel
S00AE09
1) Audio control switches*
2) Talk switch for voice command system*
3) Cruise control (page 7-45)
4) Shift paddle (page 7-27)
5) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page 3-
86)
6) SRS airbag (page 1-42)
7) Horn (page 3-86)
8) Control switches for combination meter
display (page 3-37)
9) Hands-free phone switches*
*: For details about how to use the
switches, refer to the separate naviga-
tion/audio Owner’s Manual.
18
(21,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
S00AE04
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-60)
2) Mist (page 3-61)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-62)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-63)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-62)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-61)
7) Light control switch (page 3-48)
8) Front fog light switch (page 3-59)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-49)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change
(page 3-51)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-58)
– CONTINUED –
19
0
(22,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Combination meter
S00AE05
! U.S. spec. models (type A)
S00AE0538
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
3) Speedometer (page 3-9)
4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
3-30)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
20
(23,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! U.S. spec. models (type B)
S00AE0503
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
3) Speedometer (page 3-9)
4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
3-30)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
– CONTINUED –
21
0
(24,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Except U.S. spec. models (type A)
S00AE0531
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
3) Speedometer (page 3-9)
4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
3-30)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
22
(25,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Except U.S. spec. models (type B)
S00AE0519
1) Tachometer (page 3-10)
2) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
3) Speedometer (page 3-9)
4) Temperature gauge (page 3-11)
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (page
3-30)
6) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-9)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-11)
– CONTINUED –
23
0
(26,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Warning and indicator lights
S00AE06
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-13
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
3-13
SRS airbag system
warning light
3-14
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
3-15
Charge warning light 3-16
Oil pressure warning
light
3-16
Engine low oil level
warning indicator
3-16
AT OIL TEMP warning
light
3-17
/ ABS warning light 3-18
/
Brake system warning
light
3-19
Mark Name Page
/
Electronic parking
brake indicator light
3-21
Hill Holder indicator
light
3-22
Door open indicator 3-22
Low fuel warning light 3-22
All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light
3-22
Power steering warning
light
3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light
3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
3-24
Access key warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-25
Security indicator light 3-29
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-30
Mark Name Page
High beam indicator
light
3-30
High beam assist indi-
cator (green) (if
equipped)
3-30
High beam assist warn-
ing indicator (yellow)
(if equipped)
3-30
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (if equipped)
3-31
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light/
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)
3-57
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
3-31
Cruise control indicator 3-30
Cruise control set indi-
cator
3-31
X-MODE indicator (if
equipped)
3-31
Hill descent control in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-31
Headlight indicator light 3-31
24
(27,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Mark Name Page
Low tire pressure warn-
ing light (U.S. spec.
models)
3-17
/
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag ON indicator
light
3-15
/
Front passenger’s fron-
tal airbag OFF indicator
light
3-15
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
3-22
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-31
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
3-32
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
3-32
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
3-32
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-32
Sonar audible alarm
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-32
25
0
(28,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Function settings
S00AF
& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display
S00AF01
Setting adjustments to the following items can be manually changed within the combination meter display to meet your personal
requirements.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Keyless Access (if equipped) Audible signal*
1
On/Off On 2-19
Hazard warning flasher On/Off On 2-26
Door unlock selection function
(driver’s door unlock)
Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only 2-18, 3-47
Door unlock selection function
(rear gate unlock)
Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal*
1
On/Off On 2-27
Hazard warning flasher On/Off On 2-27
Defogger and deicer system Rear window defogger, out-
side mirror defogger and
windshield wiper deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes 3-47, 3-64
Map light/Dome light/Cargo
area light
Operation of map light/dome
light/cargo area light Off delay
timer
Off/10 seconds/20 seconds/
30 seconds
30 seconds 3-47, 6-3
Auto Headlights Light Sensitivity Max/Mid/Low/Min Mid 3-48, 3-49
Wiper Link On/Off On 3-48, 3-49
Welcome lighting function Approaching Time Set Off/30 seconds/60 seconds/
90 seconds
30 seconds 3-48, 3-50
Leaving Time Set Off/30 seconds/60 seconds/
90 seconds
30 seconds
26
(29,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 18
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Auto door lock and unlock Automatic door lock function Vehicle speed/Shift to P posi-
tion/off
Vehicle Speed 3-47
Automatic door unlock func-
tion
Shift Out of PARK/Ignition Off/
Driver Door Open/Off
Driver Door Open 3-47
*1: This setting also works as the On/Off setting of the power rear gate buzzer for starting operation.
However, you cannot change the warning buzzer setting for a detecting jam, etc.
& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display
S00AF02
For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.
Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-30
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-26, 2-27
& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer
S00AF03
Item Function Available settings
Factory default
setting
Alarm system
Monitoring start delay time (after closing
doors)
0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only models with
shock sensors (dealer option))
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Map light/Dome light/Cargo area light
illumination
ON/OFF OFF
Keyless access with push-button Audible signal volume*
2
Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Trunk open without key (Legacy) ON/OFF ON
Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume*
2
Level 1 to 7 Level 5
One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane changer ON/OFF ON
– CONTINUED –
27
0
(30,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Item Function Available settings
Factory default
setting
Remote trunk open/power rear gate
open function
*1
Activation of trunk opening/power rear
gate opening by remote transmitter/ac-
cess key fob
Operation/Non-operation Operation
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Battery drainage prevention function Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto dimmer cancel Sensitivity of the operation of the auto
dimmer cancel
OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid
High beam assist function*
1
High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper op-
eration
Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec. models:
Non-operation
Other models: Op-
eration
*1: If equipped
*2: The audible signal volume cannot be set under level 5 for the warning chime.
28
(33,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S01
Front seats .............................................................. 1-2
Manual seat (if equipped) ....................................... 1-4
Power seat (if equipped) ........................................ 1-5
Head restraint adjustment ...................................... 1-8
Seat heater (if equipped) ........................................ 1-9
Front seat heater ..................................................1-10
Rear seat heater (if equipped) ...............................1-10
Rear seats.............................................................. 1-11
Reclining the seatback (Outback) .......................... 1-11
Folding down the rear seatback ............................1-12
Head restraint adjustment .....................................1-14
Armrest ................................................................1-15
Seatbelts................................................................ 1-16
Seatbelt safety tips ............................................... 1-16
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)......................1-17
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR)............................................1-17
Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................1-17
Fastening the seatbelt...........................................1-17
Seatbelt maintenance............................................ 1-24
Front seatbelt pretensioners................................ 1-25
System monitors...................................................1-26
System servicing .................................................. 1-26
Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-27
Child restraint systems ........................................ 1-27
Where to place a child restraint system ................ 1-29
Choosing a child restraint system......................... 1-30
Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
seatbelt ............................................................. 1-31
Installing a booster seat ....................................... 1-35
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................ 1-36
Top tether anchorages .......................................... 1-39
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System
airbag) ................................................................ 1-42
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system .............................................................. 1-42
Components......................................................... 1-49
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system, SRS
seat cushion airbag, SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag .................................................... 1-52
System operation ................................................. 1-57
SRS airbag system monitors................................. 1-69
SRS airbag system servicing ................................ 1-70
Precautions against vehicle modification .............. 1-71
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
(34,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Front seats
S01AA
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers or cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, move it
back and forth to make sure it is
securely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are not in the
proper position when the SRS
airbag deploys could suffer very
serious injuries. Because the
SRS airbag needs enough space
for deployment, the driver should
always sit upright and well back
in the seat as far from the steer-
ing wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater. Consequently, we
strongly recommend that ALL chil-
dren (including those in child seats
and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all times
in a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt, whichever is appropriate
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-2
(35,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
for the child’s age, height and
weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-27.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the seat-
back. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
improper operation of the following
systems and could result in serious
injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
. SRS seat cushion airbag
. Front seat heater (if equipped)
. Power seat (if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-3
1
(36,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Manual seat (if equipped)
S01AA01
! Forward and backward adjustment
S01AA0101
1. Sit in the seat to adjust.
2. Pull the lever upward, slide the seat to
the desired position, and then release the
lever.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure that it is securely locked into
place.
! Reclining the seatback
S01AA0102
1. Pull up the reclining lever, adjust the
seatback to the desired position, and then
release the lever.
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
pulling up the lever. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
! Seat cushion height adjustment
(driver’s seat)
S01AA0103
1) Push the lever down to lower the seat.
2) Pull the lever up to raise the seat.
You can adjust the height of the seat by
moving the seat cushion adjustment lever
up or down.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-4
(37,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Power seat (if equipped)
S01AA02
! Driver’s seat
S01AA0208
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward. During forward/backward ad-
justment of the seat, you cannot adjust
the seat cushion angle or seat cushion
height.
2) Seat cushion angle control switch
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
3) Seat height control switch
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
4) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
5) Lumbar support control switch
To increase lower back support, push the
front side of the switch. To decrease
lower back support, push the rear side of
the switch.
! Front passenger’s seat (if equipped)
S01AA0209
1) Seat position forward/backward con-
trol switch
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or
backward.
2) Seatback angle (reclining) control
switch
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-5
1
(38,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Memory function (driver’s seat – if
equipped)
S01AA0207
WARNING
. To avoid loss of vehicle control or
personal injury, never perform
the following operations while
driving.
– Adjusting the seat
– Retrieving the seat position
. Before adjusting the seat or re-
trieving a registered seat posi-
tion, make sure that cargo or the
hands and feet of rear seat pas-
sengers are clear of the adjusting
mechanism.
. Perform the seat position retrie-
val before driving. Be sure to
confirm that the select lever is in
the “P” position, and the parking
brake is applied, when adjusting
the seat position. Do not drive
until the retrieval of the seat
position is complete.
. When any unusual conditions or
malfunctions occur during the
retrieval of the seat position, stop
the retrieval of the seat position
by performing any of the follow-
ing procedures.
– Operate any of the power seat
switches
– Press the “SET” button
– Press button “1” or “2”
Some of your desired seat positions can
be registered. Register the seat position
with button “1” or “2” or each of the key fobs
and retrieve the seat position.
The following seat positions can be regis-
tered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
. Angle of seat cushion
. Height of seat
! Registration of seat position with
button “1” or “2”
S01AA020701
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
2. While pressing the “SET” button, press
and hold the desired button “1” or “2”.
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered.
! Registration of seat position with
each key fob
S01AA020703
1. Adjust the seat position under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is applied.
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-6
(39,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
2. While holding the access key fob and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “
”
button of the access key fob.
A chirp sounds once, and the seat position
is registered.
! Retrieval of seat position regis-
tered with button “1” or “2”
S01AA020702
WARNING
Be sure to press the correct button
to retrieve your registered seat posi-
tion. If the seat position is not
optimum for you, it may adversely
affect your driving and may reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt.
That could result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. While the select lever is in the “P”
position and the parking brake is applied,
press button “1” or “2”.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position. When the seat moves
to the registered position, a chirp will
sound.
NOTE
. If a new position is registered for the
same button, the previously registered
seat position is deleted.
. If the vehicle battery is removed, the
registered seat position is not deleted.
. When the button “1” or “2” is
pressed within 45 seconds after the
driver’s door is opened, the registered
seat position can be retrieved even if
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or
“OFF” position.
! Retrieval of the seat position
registered with access key fob
S01AA020704
1. Hold the registered access key fob.
2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressing
the “
” button or gripping the door handle.
3. Open the driver’s door.
A chirp sounds and the seat moves to the
registered position. When the seat moves
to the registered position, a chirp will
sound.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-7
1
(40,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
. If the registered seat position cannot
be retrieved after performing the pre-
vious procedures, try the following
procedures.
(1) Press the “SET” button on the
driver’s door.
(2) Press the “
” button on the
access key fob or touch the door
lock sensor to lock the doors.
(3) Perform the prior procedures
again.
. If the keyless access function is
disabled, the seat position cannot be
retrieved by gripping the driver’s door
handle. However, the seat position can
still be retrieved by pressing the “
”
button on the access key fob. For
information about how to enable/dis-
able the keyless access function, refer
to “Disabling keyless access function”
F2-19.
. If a new position is registered for the
same access key fob, the previously
registered seat position is deleted.
! Clearing the registered seat posi-
tion with access key fob
S01AA020705
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. While holding the access key fob and
pressing the “SET” button, press the “
”
button on the access key fob.
A chirp will sound, and the registered seat
position will be cleared.
& Head restraint adjustment
S01AA04
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way around. Doing so will pre-
vent the head restraints from
functioning as intended. There-
fore, when you remove the head
restraints, you must reinstall all
head restraints correctly to pro-
tect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat
head restraints are designed to
be installed into the rear seats
only. Do not attempt to install the
front seat head restraints into the
rear seats, or the rear seat head
restraints into the front seats.
Both the driver’s seat and front passen-
ger’s seat are equipped with head re-
straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-
ble in the following ways.
! Head restraint height adjustment
S01AA0401
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
1-8
(41,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
S01AA0402
The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
To tilt:
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To return:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go. The head restraint will
automatically return to the fully upright
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
Seat heater (if equipped)
S01AB
The seat heater operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
1-9
1
(42,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Front seat heater
S01AB05
Front seat heater switch
1) HIGH mode indicator
2) MID mode indicator
3) LOW mode indicator
A) Driver’s side
B) Front passenger’s side
Press the front seat heater switch. Each
time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
When LOW mode is selected, the LOW
mode indicator on the front seat heater
switch illuminates. When MID mode is
selected, both the LOW and MID mode
indicators illuminate. When HIGH mode is
selected, all 3 LOW, MID and HIGH mode
indicators illuminate. When the OFF mode
is selected, all the indicators turn off.
Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
& Rear seat heater (if equipped)
S01AB06
Rear seat heater switch
1) LOW mode indicator
2) HIGH mode indicator
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
Press the rear seat heater switch. Each
time you press the switch, the mode will
change as follows.
When LOW mode is selected, the LOW
mode indicator on the rear seat heater
switch illuminates. When HIGH mode is
selected, both the LOW and HIGH mode
indicators illuminate. When the OFF mode
is selected, all the indicators turn off.
Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seat
to heat up quicker.
NOTE
Only the front seat heater switches
retain the previous switch position
even if the vehicle has restarted. The
rear seat switch will reset.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
1-10
(43,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Rear seats
S01AC
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Reclining the seatback
(Outback)
S01AC06
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a
cargo area cover, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
between the headrest and the
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
1-11
1
(44,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
cargo area cover when you re-
cline the rear seat.
. Move the front cover of the cargo
area cover backward so that the
cover is not damaged by the
reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-
go area cover (Outback – if
equipped)” F6-16.
Adjust the seatback to the desired position
while pulling the lever.
After adjusting the seatback, release the
lever and make sure the seatback is
securely locked into place.
& Folding down the rear seat-
back
S01AC02
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check that there are no
passengers or objects on the rear
seat. Not doing so creates a risk
of injury or property damage if
the seatback suddenly folds
down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the rear seat to its
original position, be certain to
place all of the seatbelts and the
tab attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
CAUTION
The rear seatback may fold down
quickly due to the internal spring.
Hold the seatback while pulling the
release lever to slow it down.
! Legacy
S01AC0201
To fold down the seatback, perform the
following procedure.
1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Opening
the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-26, “Opening
the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-27 or “To open
the trunk lid from inside” F2-39.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
1-12
(45,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Release lever
2. Pull the release lever on the side that
you want to fold down.
3. Fold the seatback down.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that it is securely
locked.
! Outback
S01AC0202
Release button
Release lever on both sides of the cargo
area
Unlock the seatback by performing either
of the following procedures and then fold
the seatback down.
. Push the release button.
. Pull the release lever.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place. Make sure that it is securely
locked.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
1-13
1
(46,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Head restraint adjustment
S01AC03
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
. The front seat head restraints are
designed to be installed into the
front seats only. The rear seat
head restraints are designed to
be installed into the rear seats
only. Do not attempt to install the
front seat head restraints into the
rear seats, or the rear seat head
restraints into the front seats.
! Rear window side seating position
S01AC0301
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
NOTE
For Legacy, it is not possible to remove
or install the head restraint without
folding down the rear seatback. Fold
down the rear seatback and then re-
move or install the head restraint.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
1-14
(47,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Rear center seating position
S01AC0302
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used in the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
A) When not used (retracted position)
B) When used (extended position)
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while press-
ing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
& Armrest
S01AC01
To lower the armrest, pull on the armrest’s
top edge.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
1-15
1
(48,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Seatbelts
S01AE
& Seatbelt safety tips
S01AE01
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-
port only one person. Never use a
single belt for two or more per-
sons – even children. Otherwise,
in an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. Conse-
quently, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and
precautions concerning the child
restraint system, refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-27.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
! Infants or small children
S01AE0101
Use a child restraint system that is suitable
for your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraint
systems” F1-27.
! Children
S01AE0102
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-16
(49,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
S01AE0103
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
S01AE02
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR)
S01AE03
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear seats by using a seatbelt, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
For instructions on how to install the child
restraint system using a seatbelt, refer to
“Installing child restraint systems with
ALR/ELR seatbelt” F1-31.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
S01AE04
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”
F3-13.
& Fastening the seatbelt
S01AE06
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-17
1
(50,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the front seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal injury or death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that has
been closed up in sunny weather;
they could burn an occupant. Do not
touch such hot parts until they cool.
! Front seatbelts
S01AE0601
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-18
(51,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
S01AE060101
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the upper part of the anchor and slide
the anchor down.
Pull down the anchor to make sure that it is
locked in place.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060102
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-19
1
(52,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on Outback)
S01AE0602
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060201
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that the
belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on Outback
S01AE0603
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-20
(53,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the connec-
tor’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connector’s tongue
plate not fastened to the connector’s
buckle on the right-hand side), it
cannot properly restrain the wearer
in position in an accident, possibly
resulting in serious injury or death.
Rear center seatbelt is stowed in the
recess of the ceiling.
1. Retrieve the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot in the recess by pulling the
connector (tongue) plate.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-21
1
(54,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the
retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let
the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
4. After fastening the seatbelt, make sure
that the “
” mark on the connector
(tongue) and the “
” mark on the buckle
face outwards.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle until it
clicks.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-22
(55,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as
low as possible on your hips, not on your
waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
S01AE060301
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
pointed object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push it
in. The connector (tongue) plate will then
disconnect from the buckle.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-23
1
(56,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Neatly store the tongue plate in
the recess and then insert the connector
(tongue) plate into the slot.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the tongue plate can hit
against the trim, causing damage to
the trim.
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored.
& Seatbelt maintenance
S01AE07
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and
lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye the
belts because this could seriously affect
their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,
damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-
place the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
1-24
(57,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Front seatbelt pretensioners
S01AF
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving moderate to severe frontal and
side collisions and rollover accidents.
The following sensors serve as sensors for
the pretensioners.
. Front sub sensor
. Front door impact sensor
. Rollover sensor
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, the
front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by
the retractor to take up the slack so that the
belt more effectively restrains the driver.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt cannot
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts.
. In cases of rollover accidents, as the
SRS curtain airbags deploy, the seat-
belt pretensioners are activated simul-
taneously.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
– Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger
– SRS frontal airbag for driver
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
senger*
– SRS seat cushion airbag for dri-
ver
– SRS seat cushion airbag for front
passenger*
– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag op-
eration. For details, refer to “Front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-53.
. In cases of side collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
– SRS side airbag (impacted side)
(when any of the center pillar impact
sensors/front door impact sensors
senses an impact force)
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
(when the driver’s side front door
impact sensor senses an impact
force)
– Seatbelt pretensioner for front
passenger (when the front passen-
ger’s side front door impact sensor
senses an impact force)
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
1-25
1
(58,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the pre-
tensioner, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners. Also, notify the buyer of the
contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” F1-16.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the system
inoperative, possibly resulting in
serious injury. Seatbelt preten-
sioners have no user-serviceable
parts. For required servicing of
front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
S01AF03
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
The seatbelt pretensioners share the
control module with the SRS airbag
system. Therefore, if any malfunction
occurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, the
SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbag
system monitors” F1-69.
& System servicing
S01AF04
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
1-26
(59,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
The sensors and SRS airbag control
module are located in the following
locations.
. Front sub sensors: on both sides
of the radiator panel
. Front door impact sensors: on
both front doors
. SRS airbag control module (in-
cluding the impact sensors and
rollover sensor): under the center
console
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
S01AF05
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts to your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the door pillar
or specified for individual vehicle
models in this Owner’s Manual.
Child restraint systems
S01AG
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those covered under the section in
this manual, entitled “Installation of child
restraint systems by use of lower and
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-27
1
(60,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-36).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot pro-
tect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be
caught between the passenger and
objects inside the vehicle. Addition-
ally, holding a child in your lap or
arms in the front seat exposes that
child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-28
(61,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
S01AG01
The following descriptions are SUBARU’s
recommendations on where to place a
child restraint system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equipment
is provided for installing a child restraint
system.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-
belts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
anchorage (tether anchorage, if equipped)
are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
When you install a child restraint system in
the rear seat’s center seating position,
raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat in
the center seating position if a child
restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you
should install the child restraint system in a
rear seat, window-side seating position.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Put children in the
rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint de-
vices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times. You should choose a
restraint device which is appro-
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-29
1
(62,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
priate for the child’s age, height
and weight. According to acci-
dent statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages
(bars) for a seat in the center
seating position unless a child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit and specify
using anchors spaced as far
apart as those in this vehicle.
. Do not connect two or more lower
hooks onto the same anchorage
(bar).
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A
REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
& Choosing a child restraint
system
S01AG02
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protection. The child
restraint system should meet all applicable
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system or
the manufacture’s statement of compli-
ance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to make
sure that the child restraint system is
compatible with the vehicle in which it will
be used.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-30
(63,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
S01AG04
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in position.
If it is not held tight and secure,
the danger of your child suffering
personal injury in the event of an
accident may be increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, adjust both seatbacks
at the same angle. Otherwise, the
child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained, causing
death or serious injuries in the
event of sudden stop, sudden
steering maneuver or an acci-
dent.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
S01AG0401
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-31
1
(64,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. If using the seatbelt in the ALR mode is
recommended by the manufacturer’s in-
structions supplied with the child restraint
system, perform the following procedure.
(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
(2) Allow the belt to rewind into the
retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as ALR.
6. Push and pull the child restraint system
forward and side to side to check that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALR
mode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portion
of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-32
(65,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by retracting the
seatbelt fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
S01AG0402
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
that it is securely locked into place.
2. If the child restraint system makes
contact with the head restraint of the rear
seating position where the child restraint
system is to be installed, raise the head
restraint to the extended position. If the
child restraint system still makes contact,
remove the head restraint. For details,
refer to “Head restraint adjustment” F1-
14.
CAUTION
Store the head restraint that has
been removed in the trunk or cargo
area. Avoid placing the head re-
straint in the passenger compart-
ment to prevent it from being thrown
around in the passenger compart-
ment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn.
3. For the Outback, adjust the seatback
to the upright position.
4. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system on the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to place a child restraint
system” F1-29.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system follow-
ing the instructions provided by its manu-
facturer.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-33
1
(66,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) to
the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
9. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Legacy
Outback
11. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
For additional instructions, refer to “Top
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-34
(67,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
tether anchorages” F1-39.
12. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
S01AG05
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it.
The child should sit well back on the
booster seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-35
1
(68,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to twist
the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious internal
injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
S01AG07
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-36
(69,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your vehicle
without use of the seatbelts. Such child
restraint systems are secured to the
dedicated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating posi-
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
Legacy
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-37
1
(70,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Outback
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided for all the seating
positions (center and both window-side
ones) of the rear seat.
You will find marks “ ” at the rear seat
cushion. These marks indicate the posi-
tions of the lower anchorages (bars).
Each lower anchorage is located behind
the cover of seatback bottom.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Peel off the anchorage cover from the
selected side of the rear seatback to
expose the anchorages (bars) to be used
for installation of the child restraint system.
1. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-38
(71,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
2. If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses tether
belts to connect the child restraint system
properly to the lower anchorages), while
pushing the child restraint into the seat
cushion, pull both left and right lower tether
belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in
the belt.
3. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-39.
4. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and left and right to verify that it is
firmly secured in the center of the seat.
5. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
S01AG09
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be installed
in the rear seat. When installing a child
restraint system using top tether, proceed
as follows, while observing the instructions
by the child restraint system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-39
1
(72,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Tether anchorage location
S01AG0901
! Legacy
S01AG090101
Three tether anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat head
restraint. Open the cover flap to use each
anchorage.
! Outback
S01AG090102
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
right, center and left positions, are already
installed on the back side of the rear
seatback.
! To hook the top tether
S01AG0902
CAUTION
Always raise the head restraint
when mounting a child restraint
system with a top tether. Failure to
do so may prevent the top tether
from being fastened tightly.
! Legacy
S01AG090201
1) When installing on the window-side
seating position
2) When installing on the rear center seating
position
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-40
(73,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
position where the child restraint system is
to be installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages.
2. Open the cover flaps to use the
anchorages.
3. Pass the top tether between the head
restraint and seatback.
4. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
! Outback
S01AG090202
1) When installing on the window-side
seating position
2) When installing on the rear center seating
position
1. Raise the head restraint at the seating
position where the child restraint system is
to be installed with the seatbelt or lower
anchorages.
2. Adjust the seatback to the upright
position.
3. Pass the top tether between the head
restraint and seatback.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
1-41
1
(74,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
4. Attach the top tether hook to the
appropriate upper anchorage.
5. Tighten the top tether securely.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
S01AH
*SRS: This stands for Supplemental Re-
straint System. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a lap/
shoulder belt at each front seating position
and each rear window-side seating posi-
tion. The supplemental restraint system
(SRS) consists of the following airbags.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
cushion airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
These SRS airbags are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-25.
& General precautions regard-
ing SRS airbag system
S01AH10
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supplement
to the primary protection pro-
vided by the seatbelt. It does not
eliminate the need to fasten seat-
belts. In combination with the
seatbelts, it offers the best com-
bined protection in case of a
serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-16.
. The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. They do not eliminate the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-42
(75,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
important to wear your seatbelt to
help avoid injuries that can result
when an occupant is not seated
in a proper upright position.
WARNING
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always sit
upright and well back in the seat
as far from the steering wheel as
practical while still maintaining
full vehicle control and the front
passenger should move the seat
as far back as possible and sit
upright and well back in the seat.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbags are stored in
both front seat seatbacks next to
the door, and they provide pro-
tection by deploying rapidly (fas-
ter than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact collision.
However, the force of SRS side
airbag deployment may cause
injuries if your head or other
parts of the body are too close
to the SRS side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the rear
seat), and they provide protec-
tion by deploying rapidly (faster
than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact, a rollover
or an offset frontal collision de-
pending on circumstances. How-
ever, the force of its deployment
may cause injuries if your head is
too close to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed (faster than
the blink of an eye) and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-43
1
(76,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-acci-
dent braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms be-
cause of the SRS airbag deploy-
ment force.
WARNING
. Do not rest your arm on either
front door or its internal trim. You
could be injured in the event of
SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
WARNING
. Do not put any objects (including
straps or cord) over the steering
wheel pad, column cover, or
dashboard.
– These objects could be en-
tangled with the steering
wheel, preventing the SRS
frontal airbag, etc. from oper-
ating properly.
– If the SRS frontal airbag de-
ploys, these objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-44
(77,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the inside rear view mirror. If
the SRS airbag deploys, those ob-
jects could become projectiles that
could seriously injure vehicle occu-
pants.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. A
hands-free microphone or other
accessory in such a location
could be propelled through the
cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not place hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. If such
items were hanging on the coat
hooks during deployment of the
SRS curtain airbags, they could
cause serious injuries by coming
off the coat hooks and being thrown
through the cabin or by preventing
deployment of the curtain airbags.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-45
1
(78,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback/seat cushion and do
not attach labels or stickers to the
front seat surface on or near the SRS
side airbag/SRS seat cushion air-
bag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag/
SRS seat cushion airbag, reducing
protection available to the front
seat’s occupant.
WARNING
Put children in the rear seat properly
restrained at all times. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if they
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults, their
risk of being injured from deploy-
ment is greater.
Consequently, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
have outgrown child restraint de-
vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at all
times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-27.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-46
(79,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-47
1
(80,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger’s seat
facing the side window
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
– Put his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breath-
ing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to inform the buyer that the vehicle
is equipped with SRS airbags. Also,
notify the buyer of the applicable sec-
tion in this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to “If your vehicle is involved in an
accident” F9-24.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-48
(81,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Components
S01AH11
1) SRS frontal airbag
2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
4) SRS seat cushion airbag
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under an
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the trim cover on the
door side of each front seat cushion that
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat)
An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
top of each center pillar.
SRS seat cushion airbag: in the center
console side of the front seat cushion that
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-49
1
(82,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
2) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
3) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
4) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
5) SRS airbag system warning light
6) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
7) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor and rollover sensor)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-50
(83,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
2) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
3) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
4) Seat cushion airbag module (driver’s
side)
5) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
6) Seat cushion airbag module (front pas-
senger’s side)
7) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
8) Seatbelt pretensioner (left-hand side)
9) Side airbag module (left-hand side)
10) Seatbelt buckle switch (left-hand side)
11) Seatbelt buckle switch (right-hand side)
12) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
13) Side airbag module (right-hand side)
14) Seatbelt pretensioner (right-hand side)
15) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-51
1
(84,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
16) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor and control module
17) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-
sor
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system, SRS seat
cushion airbag, SRS side air-
bag and SRS curtain airbag
S01AH02
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the SRS
frontal airbag at the time of deployment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-
tached to the glove box lid beginning with
the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
SRS curtain airbag system that complies
with the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) No. 226.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” F1-49.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS seat cushion airbags
. SRS curtain airbag*
1
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head and chest.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact to the occupant’s chest and
waist.
In a moderate to severe side impact
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-52
(85,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side win-
dow and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head.
NOTE
The SRS side airbag and seatbelt pre-
tensioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
S01AH0201
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dual
stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
S01AH0202
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the passenger’s occupant detection sys-
tem sensor located under the seat.
The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passen-
ger’s seatbelt. Using the total seat load
and seatbelt tension data from the sen-
sors, the occupant detection system de-
termines whether the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag should or should not be
inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
. Do not apply any strong impact to
the front passenger’s seat such
as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat-
back and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger’s seat. If liquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your vehi-
cle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
backward-forward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Manual seat” F1-4
(models equipped with manual
seats only).
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system warn-
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-53
1
(86,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
ing light will illuminate. Have the system
inspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-
diately if the SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle inspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not let anyone use
the front passenger’s seat while you are
driving the vehicle to your SUBARU deal-
er.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
S01AH0203
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators” F3-15.
! Occupant detection system
S01AH0209
The occupant detection system sensor is
installed under the seat and monitors the
total load on the front passenger’s seat.
The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passen-
ger’s seatbelt. Using the total seat load
and seatbelt tension data from the sen-
sors, the occupant detection system de-
termines whether the following airbags
should be deployed or not.
. Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators do not work properly
even when the front passenger’s seat is
dry, do not allow anyone to sit on the front
passenger’s seat and have the occupant
detection system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
S01AH0204
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding
the front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in a
correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward fa-
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also seated
in the REAR seat. This is because
children sitting in the front passen-
ger’s seat may be killed or severely
injured should the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR
seats are the safest place for chil-
dren.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-54
(87,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appro-
priate child restraint system, ob-
serve the following precautions.
Failure to do so may increase the
load on the front passenger’s seat,
activating the front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag even though that
seat is occupied by an infant.
. Do not place any article on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one infant
in the child restraint system.
. Do not install any accessory such
as a table or TV onto the seat-
back.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to place his/her hands or
legs on the front passenger’s
seatback, or allow him/her to pull
the seatback.
! If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates
and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small
child is in a child restraint sys-
tem (including booster seat)
S01AH020401
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system from
the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
F1-27, correctly install the child restraint
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
spective of whether the airbag is deac-
tivated or activated. If the front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
(the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off), take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-55
1
(88,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and imme-
diately contact your SUBARU dealer for
an inspection. Even if the system has
passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
S01AH0205
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions is met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an adult, observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so may lessen the load on the front
passenger’s seat, deactivating the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
despite the fact that the seat is
occupied by an adult. This may
result in personal injury.
. Do not allow the rear seat occu-
pant to lift the front passenger’s
seat cushion using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the
front passenger’s seat, or
squeeze any article from behind
and under the seat. This may lift
the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article be-
tween the front passenger’s seat
and side trim/pillar, door or cen-
ter console box. This may lift the
seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and the
ON indicator turns off even when
the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an adult
S01AH020501
This can be caused by the adult incorrectly
sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take the
following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ensure that there is no article, book,
shoe, or other object trapped under the
seat, at the rear of the seat, or on the side
of the seat.
3. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-56
(89,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! How to contact the vehicle manu-
facturer concerning modifications
for persons with disabilities that
may affect the advanced airbag
system
S01AH0208
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side
frame, instrument panel, combination me-
ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,
suspension or floor panel can affect the
operation of the SUBARU advanced air-
bag system. If you have any questions,
you may contact the following SUBARU
distributors:
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Retailer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
Dededo, Guam 96921-6255
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
& System operation
S01AH12
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components with bare hands right
after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
When the SRS airbag(s) deploy(s), a
sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be
heard and some smoke will be released.
These occurrences are a normal result of
the deployment. This smoke does not
indicate a fire in the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-57
1
(90,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
operation
S01AH1201
1) Driver’s side
2) Passenger’s side
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
pending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front
passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor. For this reason, only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors inside both front
fenders and the impact sensors in the
airbag control module detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s) to
inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags use dual stage inflators. The two
inflators of each airbag are triggered either
sequentially or simultaneously, depending
on the severity of impact in the case of the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag and depending
on the severity of impact and the total load
on the seat in the case of the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belt pretensioners operate at the same
time in both of the following cases.
. When only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys
. When driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbags deploy
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesser frontal impacts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most rollover accidents
because deployment of these airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-58
(91,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
! Examples of accident in which
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will most likely deploy
S01AH120101
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
S01AH120102
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags may be activated when the vehicle
sustains a hard impact in the undercar-
riage area from the road surface (such as
when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,
is severely impacted or knocked hard
against an obstacle on the road such as
a curb).
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-59
1
(92,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
S01AH120103
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of a
truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-60
(93,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) is not designed
to deploy in most cases
S01AH120104
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will
not be activated on the second impact.
WARNING
If the vehicle is damaged in an
accident but the SRS frontal airbag
does not deploy, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-61
1
(94,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! SRS seat cushion airbag operation
S01AH1203
1) Driver’s side
2) Passenger’s side
WARNING
The SRS seat cushion airbag is
designed not to deploy when the
seatbelt for the corresponding seat
is not fastened. For safety, all per-
sons in the vehicle should fasten
their seatbelts.
The SRS seat cushion airbags are de-
signed to deploy simultaneously when the
SRS frontal airbags deploy. For details
about the operating conditions, refer to
“SUBARU advanced frontal airbag opera-
tion” F1-58.
The front passenger’s SRS seat cushion
airbag is designed not to deploy in either of
the following conditions.
. The front passenger’s seatbelt is not
fastened (even when the front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates
while the OFF indicator remains off).
. The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator is off while the OFF indicator
illuminates.
NOTE
When the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag is deactivated by the occupant
detection system, the front passen-
ger’s SRS seat cushion airbag is also
deactivated.
! SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag operation
S01AH1202
The following airbags deploy indepen-
dently of each other because each has
its own impact sensor.
. Driver’s SRS side airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-62
(95,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
deploys independently of the driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags in
the steering wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the following
locations.
. In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
. In the left and right rear wheel houses
. In the airbag control module
. In the left and right front fenders (only
SRS curtain airbags are designed to
deploy when the front sub sensors sense
a severe impact.)
A rollover sensor is also located inside the
airbag control module.
If both of the following sensors together
sense an impact force above a predeter-
mined level in a side collision, the control
module causes both the SRS side airbag
and curtain airbag on the impacted side
to inflate regardless of whether the rear
wheel house impact sensor on the same
side senses an impact.
. the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module
. one of the center pillar impact sensors
or front door impact sensors
If both of the following sensors together
sense an impact force above a predeter-
mined level in a side collision, the control
module causes only the SRS curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
. the impact sensor that is located in the
airbag control module
. one of the rear wheel house impact
sensors
Even if a frontal collision occurs, both right
and left SRS curtain airbags will deploy
when the front sensor and the control unit
determine that the impact results from an
offset frontal collision.
The SRS curtain airbags are designed to
deploy under the following conditions.
. The driver’s SRS frontal airbag deploys
or the driver’s and passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags deploy in a frontal collision.
. The system determines that the colli-
sion is an offset frontal collision.
. The vehicle is in an extremely inclined
state such as during a rollover.
The SRS curtain airbags are basically not
designed to deploy in the following cases.
. In a frontal collision when the SRS
frontal airbags do not deploy or the system
determines that the collision is other than
an offset frontal collision
. In most lesser inclined states
If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the
vehicle, the control module inflates the
SRS curtain airbags. At this time, the
driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners also operate at the same
time.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of an
eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
. to deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe side impact
collision
. to function on a one-time-only basis.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. in most lesser side impacts
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-63
1
(96,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. in most rear impacts (because the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment would not protect the occupant in
those situations)
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deployment depend on the level of
force experienced in the passenger com-
partment during a side impact collision.
That level differs from one type of collision
to another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy
S01AH120201
A severe side impact near the front seat or
the rear seat.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-64
(97,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most
likely deploy
S01AH120204
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstone
laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-65
1
(98,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS curtain
airbag will deploy
S01AH120205
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS curtain airbags
will deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-66
(99,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to
deploy
S01AH120202
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-67
1
(100,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely
to deploy
S01AH120206
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-
on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-68
(101,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag is
not designed to deploy in most
cases
S01AH120203
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary). (Only the SRS side airbag is
designed not to deploy in most cases)
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
S01AH04
SRS airbag system warning light
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.
The SRS airbag system warning light will
show normal system operation by illumi-
nating for approximately 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-69
1
(102,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The following components are monitored
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensors and rollover sensors)
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Center pillar impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Front door impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Rear wheel house impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Seat cushion airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Seatbelt buckle switch
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor and control module
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension
sensor
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
& SRS airbag system servicing
S01AH05
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-70
(103,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center console
. Inside each front fender
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s side and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback and seat cushion is cut,
frayed, or otherwise damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
S01AH06
WARNING
. To avoid accidental activation of
the system or rendering the sys-
tem inoperative, which may re-
sult in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any
components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes the following mod-
ifications.
– Installation of custom steering
wheels
– Attachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
– Installation of custom seats
– Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
– Installation of additional fabric
or leather on the front seat
– Attachment of a hands-free
microphone or any other ac-
cessory to a front pillar, a
center pillar, a rear pillar, the
windshield, a side window, an
assist grip, or any other cabin
surface that would be near a
– CONTINUED –
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-71
1
(104,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
deploying SRS curtain airbag
– Installation of additional elec-
trical/electronic equipment
such as a mobile two-way
radio on or near the SRS air-
bag system components and/
or wiring
– Modifications on or inside the
front door panels for the pur-
pose of a speaker replace-
ment or sound insulation
. The impact sensors, which detect
the pressure of an impact, are
located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the
doors or door trims, such as the
addition of door speakers for
example. Any modifications to
the doors create a risk of the
airbag system becoming inop-
erative or unintended airbag de-
ployment.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, bullbar, winches, snow
plow, skid/sump plate, etc.) other
than genuine SUBARU acces-
sory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you
want to install any accessory parts on your
vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
1-72
(107,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S02
Keys ......................................................................... 2-3
Key number plate................................................... 2-3
Immobilizer .............................................................. 2-4
Certification for immobilizer system ....................... 2-4
Security indicator light ........................................... 2-5
Key replacement .................................................... 2-5
Door locks ............................................................... 2-6
Locking and unlocking from the outside................. 2-6
Locking and unlocking from the inside................... 2-7
Automatic door locking/unlocking .......................... 2-8
Battery drainage prevention function...................... 2-8
Power door locking switches ................................ 2-9
Key lock-in prevention function.............................. 2-9
Keyless access with push-button start system
(if equipped) ....................................................... 2-10
Access key fob .....................................................2-10
Safety precautions ................................................ 2-11
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access”
entry function .....................................................2-14
Selecting audible signal operation.........................2-19
Selecting hazard warning flasher operation ...........2-19
Warning chimes and warning indicator..................2-19
Disabling keyless access function.........................2-19
When access key fob does not operate properly ...2-21
Replacing battery of access key fob......................2-21
Replacing access key fob .....................................2-21
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system........................................................ 2-21
PIN Code Access (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).......... 2-22
Registering a PIN code ......................................... 2-23
Unlocking............................................................. 2-24
Remote keyless entry system ............................. 2-25
Operating the access key fob................................ 2-25
Operating the transmitter ...................................... 2-27
Replacing the battery............................................ 2-28
Replacing lost transmitters ................................... 2-28
Certification for remote keyless entry system........ 2-28
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-29
System alarm operation ........................................ 2-29
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ....... 2-30
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system .............................................................. 2-30
Arming the system ............................................... 2-30
Disarming the system ........................................... 2-33
Valet mode ........................................................... 2-33
Tripped sensor identification................................. 2-34
Shock sensors (dealer option) .............................. 2-34
Child safety locks ................................................. 2-34
Windows................................................................ 2-35
Power window operation....................................... 2-35
Initialization of power window (windows with
one-touch auto up/down function)...................... 2-38
Trunk lid (Legacy)................................................. 2-38
To open and close the trunk lid from outside ........ 2-38
To open the trunk lid from inside .......................... 2-39
Internal trunk lid release handle............................ 2-39
Keys and doors
2
(108,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Rear gate (Outback).............................................. 2-41
Manual rear gate ................................................... 2-41
Power rear gate (if equipped) ................................ 2-42
Moonroof (if equipped)......................................... 2-48
Moonroof switches ............................................... 2-48
Sun shade ............................................................ 2-49
Keys and doors
(109,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Keys
S02AA
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to
“Keyless access with push-button start
system” F2-10.
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle:
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
. Trunk lid (Legacy)
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your vehicle
and valet key at a parking facility.
NOTE
Locking/unlocking using the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the key. For
detailed information, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” F2-25.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position,
thereby stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
S02AA01
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set. Write
down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
Keys and doors/Keys
2-3
2
(110,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Immobilizer
S02AB
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. This
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft
guaranty.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
If you press the push-button ignition switch
when carrying an unregistered access key
fob, the switch will not turn to the “ON”
position and the engine will not start.
If the engine does not start, perform the
procedure described in “Starting engine”
F9-20.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Even if an unregistered key fits into the
ignition switch and can be turned to the
“START” position, the engine will automa-
tically stop after several seconds.
If the engine does not start, pull out the key
once before trying again. Refer to “Ignition
switch (models without push-button start
system)” F3-4.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may be-
come hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
. Do not modify or remove the
system. If modified or removed,
the proper operation of the sys-
tem cannot be guaranteed.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the follow-
ing security precautions:
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moon-
roof, and lock the doors (all models)
and rear gate (Outback).
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
& Certification for immobilizer
system
S02AB05
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system” F2-21.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Keys and doors/Immobilizer
2-4
(111,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
– Canada-spec. models – Mexico-spec. models
& Security indicator light
S02AB02
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-29.
& Key replacement
S02AB03
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered for
use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
immobilizer system. For security reasons,
the lost key’s ID code should be erased
from the memory. To erase the lost key’s ID
code, all keys that will be used are
required.
For details about new key registration and
erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors/Immobilizer
2-5
2
(112,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Door locks
S02AC
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
S02AC01
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including an emergency key) and
open the door while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the access key
fob (except when the access key fob
battery is discharged).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” position.
. Carry the access key fob and per-
form either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle
– Press the rear gate opener button
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmit-
ter battery is discharged).
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-29.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the front.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
an unlocked door.
NOTE
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
Keys and doors/Door locks
2-6
(113,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Locking without the key
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever forward and
then close the door.
Locking without the key
1) Press the front side of the power door
locking switch.
2) Close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the
power door locking switch, press the front
side of the switch (“LOCK” side) and then
close the door. In this case, all closed
doors and the rear gate (Outback) are
locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
S02AC02
WARNING
. Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of
seatbelts and child restraints,
locking the doors reduces the
chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out by preventing a
door from being accidentally
opened, and intruders from un-
expectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
. Do not pull the front door handle
from inside while driving. The
door could open even if it is
locked.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Door locks
2-7
2
(114,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Unlock
2) Lock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (Outback) are closed before
starting to drive.
& Automatic door locking/un-
locking
S02AC08
All doors are automatically locked when
the vehicle speed reaches more than 12
mph (20 km/h).
When the driver’s door is opened, all
doors, including the trunk or rear gate,
are automatically unlocked.
NOTE
. Perform the settings of the auto-
matic door locking and unlocking on
the combination meter. Refer to “Auto
Door Lock and Unlock” F3-47. Also,
the settings can be performed by using
the navigation system. Refer to the
separate navigation/audio Owner’s
Manual.
. If the system detects a strong en-
ough impact to deploy the airbags, all
doors may be automatically unlocked.
For further details, refer to “Auto lock/
unlock operation when involved in an
accident” F9-24.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
S02AC03
If a door or the rear gate (Outback) is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention func-
tion to prevent the battery from going dead.
The following interior lights are affected by
this function.
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome light DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Cargo area
light
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact the nearest
SUBARU dealer if you would like to
change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (Outback) are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate under the
following condition.
– While the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON” (models
Keys and doors/Door locks
2-8
(115,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
with the push-button ignition
switch)
– While the key is in the ignition
switch (models without the push-
button ignition switch)
. Models with the push-button ignition
switch are also equipped with the
battery drainage prevention function
for the push-button ignition switch.
For details, refer to “Battery drainage
prevention function” F3-8.
Power door locking switches
S02AD
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (Outback) can
be locked and unlocked by the power door
locking switches located at the driver’s
side and the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, press the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, press the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set the
door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
S02AD01
This function prevents the doors from
being locked under the following condi-
tions.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
. When getting out of the vehicle from
a rear door, make sure to unlock all the
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Power door locking switches
2-9
2
(116,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
doors by pushing the unlock side of the
power door locking switch.
If a rear door is unlocked from the
inside door lever then the door is
opened and closed, the Key lock-in
prevention function will be triggered.
All doors will be unlocked, the Key lock-
in prevention warning indicator “
”
will appear and the warning chime will
also sound.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
S02AD0101
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
S02AD0102
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
Keyless access with push-
button start system
(if equipped)
S02AP
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key fob.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
rear gate (Outback)
. Opening the trunk (Legacy)
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button
start system)” F7-11.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-29.
Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access key
fob. For detailed information, refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-25.
& Access key fob
S02AP17
1) Access key fob (main)
2) Access key fob (sub)
3) Key number plate
The vehicle has two access key fobs and a
key number plate. For details about the
key number plate, refer to “Key number
plate” F2-3.
An emergency key is attached to each
access key fob. The emergency key is
used for the following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
. Unlocking the trunk lid (Legacy)
You cannot unlock the glove box without
using the emergency key. You can keep
the glove box locked when you leave your
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-10
(117,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
vehicle and the access key fob (with the
emergency key removed) at a parking
facility.
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
& Safety precautions
S02AP11
! Regarding radio wave
S02AP1101
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electric medical equip-
ment other than an implanted pace-
maker or an implanted defibrillator,
before using the keyless access
with push-button start system, refer
to “Radio waves used for the key-
less access with push-button start
system” F2-13, and contact the
electric medical equipment manu-
facturer for more information. The
radio waves from the transmitting
antennas on the vehicle could ad-
versely affect the operation of the
electric medical equipment.
CAUTION
When traveling an airplane, do not
press the button of the access key
fob. If any button of the access key
fob is pressed, radio waves are
emitted and may affect the operation
of the airplane. When carrying the
access key fob in a bag, take mea-
sures to prevent the buttons from
being pressed accidentally.
NOTE
The status of the access key fob and
environmental conditions may interfere
with the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle under
the following conditions.
. When operating near a source of
strong radio waves or other interfer-
ence, such as a broadcast station or
power transmission lines
. When products that transmit radio
waves are used, such as an access key
fob or a remote transmitter key of
another vehicle
. When carrying the access key fob of
your vehicle together with an access
key fob or a remote transmitter of
another vehicle
. When the access key fob is placed
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-11
2
(118,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
near wireless communication equip-
ment such as a cell phone, or near a
metallic object
. When metallic accessories are at-
tached to the access key fob
. When carrying the access key fob
with electronic appliances such as a
laptop computer
. When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged
In such cases, it may not be possible to
lock or unlock the doors or start the
engine.
! Regarding malfunction
S02AP1102
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key fob inside the vehicle or
within 6.6 ft (2 m) around the
vehicle (e.g., in the garage). The
access key fob may be locked
inside the vehicle, or the battery
may discharge rapidly. Note that
the push-button ignition switch
may not turn on in some cases
depending on the location of the
access key fob.
. The access key fob contains
electronic components. Observe
the following precautions to pre-
vent malfunctions or battery dis-
charge.
– It is recommended to have the
access key battery replaced at
an authorized SUBARU dealer
to avoid the risk of damage.
– Do not get the access key fob
wet. If the access key fob gets
wet, wipe it off immediately
and let it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts to
the access key fob.
– Keep the access key fob away
from magnetic sources.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a personal computer
or home electrical appliance.
– Do not leave the access key
fob near a battery charger or
any electrical accessories.
– Do not apply metallic window
tint or attach metallic objects
to the windows.
– Do not fit non genuine acces-
sories and parts.
– Never leave the access key
fob in direct sunlight or any-
where that may become hot,
such as on the dashboard. It
may damage the battery or
cause circuit malfunctions.
– Do not wash the access key
fob in an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key
fob in humid or dusty loca-
tions, or near personal com-
puters or home electric appli-
ances.
NOTE
After the vehicle battery is discharged
or replaced, initialization of the steering
lock system may be required to start
the engine. In this case, perform the
following procedure to initialize the
steering lock.
1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For de-
tails, refer to “Switching power status”
F3-7.
2) Open and close the driver’s door.
3) Wait for approximately 10 seconds.
When the steering is locked, the initi-
alization is completed.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-12
(119,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Regarding access key fob
S02AP1103
CAUTION
If the access key fob is dropped, the
integrated emergency key inside
may become loose. Be careful not
to lose the emergency key.
NOTE
. The access key fob is always com-
municating with the vehicle and is
continuously using the battery.
Although the life of the battery varies
depending on the operating conditions,
it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If the
battery becomes fully discharged, re-
place it with a new one.
. If an access key fob is lost, it is
recommended that the access key fob
be reregistered. For reregistration of an
access key fob, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. Up to 7 access key fobs can be
registered for one vehicle. For a spare
access key fob, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with the access key fob. It is
necessary for vehicle repair and addi-
tional registration of access key fobs.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the storage spaces inside the vehicle.
Vibrations may damage the key or turn
on the switch, possibly resulting in a
lockout.
! Regarding setting
S02AP1104
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting proce-
dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-
cess function” F2-19. The setting can
also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess function is switched to the non-
operational mode, refer to “Access key
fob – if access key fob does not operate
properly” F9-19.
! Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem
S02AP1105
The keyless access with push-button start
system uses radio waves of 134 kHz, in
addition to the radio waves used for the
remote keyless entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output from the
antennas installed on the vehicle as shown
in the following illustrations.
Legacy
1) Antenna
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-13
2
(120,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Outback
1) Antenna
& Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry func-
tion
S02AP01
! Operating ranges
S02AP0101
Legacy
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
Outback
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
. The operating range of the door lock-
ing/unlocking function is approximately 16
to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the respective
door handle.
. For Legacy, the operating range of the
trunk opening function is approximately 16
to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the trunk opener
button.
. For Outback, the operating range of
the rear gate locking/unlocking function is
approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm)
from the rear gate ornament.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-14
(121,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) LED indicator
When the access key fob is within either of
the operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key fob
flashes. When the keyless access func-
tions are disabled, the LED indicator does
not flash unless a button on the access key
fob is pressed.
! Operating range tips
S02AP010101
Regarding malfunction:
The keyless access function may not
operate properly due to the following
reasons.
. The access key fob is placed too close
to the vehicle body (in this case, repeat the
operation from further away).
. The access key fob is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from the
ground, even if it is in the indicated
operating range.
. The status of the access key fob and
the radio wave conditions around the
vehicle (in this case, perform the proce-
dure described in “Locking and unlocking”
F9-19.
Precautions:
. When the access key fob is within the
operating range, it is possible for anyone,
even someone who is not carrying the
access key fob, to operate the keyless
access function. Please note that the
keyless access function is only available
for the following items when the access
key fob is detected within operating range.
– Door handle
– Door lock sensor
– Rear gate opener button (Outback)
– Trunk opener button (Legacy)
– Rear lock button (Outback)
. It is not possible to lock the doors and
rear gate using the keyless access func-
tion when the access key fob is inside the
vehicle. However, depending on the status
of the access key fob and the environ-
mental conditions, the access key fob may
be locked inside the vehicle. Before lock-
ing, make sure that you have the access
key fob.
. The operating ranges may be reduced,
or the keyless access function may not
operate in the following cases:
– When the battery of the access key
fob is discharged
– When the access key fob is in a
location with strong radio waves or
noise (e.g., near a radio tower, power
plant, broadcast station or an area
where wireless equipment is used)
– While talking on a cell phone
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and unlocking”
F9-19.
. When an access key fob is in the
operating range, if the door handle be-
comes wet due to exposure to a significant
amount of water when the vehicle is
washed or during heavy rain, the doors
may be locked or unlocked.
! How to use keyless access func-
tions
S02AP0102
! Keyless access function tips
S02AP010215
. Turn off the push-button ignition switch
before locking the doors (including rear
gate) using the keyless access function. It
is not possible to lock the doors (including
the rear gate) using the keyless access
function when the push-button ignition
switch is on the “ACC” or “ON” position.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-15
2
(122,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
For details about turning off the push-
button ignition switch, refer to “Switching
power status” F3-7.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched three
times or more repeatedly, the system will
ignore the sensor operation.
. When performing the locking proce-
dure too quickly, locking may not have
been completed. After locking the doors, it
is recommended to pull the REAR door
handles to confirm that the doors have
been locked.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure, close
the opened door or rear gate to lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not possible
to unlock doors and/or the rear gate by
using the keyless access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key fob to prevent locking the
access key fob in the vehicle.
! Unlocking
S02AP010201
Carry the access key fob, and grip the door
handle.
. When the driver’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door will be
unlocked.
. When the front passenger’s door han-
dle is gripped, all doors (for Outback,
including the rear gate) will be unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
! Opening rear gate (Outback)
S02AP010210
1) Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
rear gate opener button. Only the rear gate
will be unlocked and opened. Also, an
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-16
(123,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Opening trunk (Legacy)
S02AP010211
1) Trunk opener button
Carry the access key fob, and press the
trunk opener button. The trunk will open.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
trunk can be opened without the key
fob.
. The trunk lock/unlock setting is set
to on.
. All doors are unlocked.
The trunk lock/unlock setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to change the
setting.
! Locking with the door lock sensor
S02AP010214
1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
(for Outback, including the rear gate) and
touch the door lock sensor on the door
handle. All doors including the rear gate
will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors (including the rear
gate), if you touch the door lock sensor
once more to attempt the lock opera-
tion without first unlocking the doors,
nothing will happen, even if the door
lock sensor is touched. In this case,
perform the unlocking operation once
first. You can then touch the door lock
sensor to lock the doors.
! Locking with the rear lock button
(Outback)
S02AP010213
1) Rear lock button
Carry the access key fob, close all doors
including the rear gate and press the rear
lock button. The rear gate and all doors will
be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-17
2
(124,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Power saving function
S02AP0103
To protect the access key battery and the
vehicle battery, the keyless access func-
tion will be disabled as follows.
. When the keyless access function and
the remote keyless entry system have not
been used:
(1) 5 days after the push-button igni-
tion switch has been turned off, com-
munication between the antennas and
the access key fob will be stopped.
(2) 9 days after step (1), the sensors
(both lock sensor and unlock sensor)
on the front passenger’s door will be
disabled.
. When the access key fob has been left
in the operating range for 10 minutes or
longer while all doors are locked, the
keyless access function will be disabled.
! Recovery from power saving
mode
S02AP010301
When one of the following operations is
performed, the keyless access function
will be recovered.
. Unlock by gripping the door handle
(only when the sensors on the front
passenger’s door are not disabled) or
pressing the rear gate opener button on
the rear gate (Outback)/trunk opener
button on the trunk lid (Legacy)
. Lock or unlock by the remote keyless
entry system
. Open a door and then close it
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position
! Power saving function of access
key fob
S02AP0107
This function stops the access key fob
from receiving signals and helps minimize
the battery consumption of the access key
fob.
1. Press the “
” button twice while hold-
ing the “
” button.
1) LED indicator
2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4
times to notify that the setting is complete.
When the access key fob is in the power
save mode, the keyless access function
and push-button start system will not be
available.
To cancel the power save mode, press one
of the buttons on the access key fob.
! Door unlock selection function
S02AP0105
The door unlock selection function makes
the following operations possible.
. Unlocking the driver’s door without
unlocking any other doors (including the
rear gate) when gripping the driver’s door
handle
. For Outback, opening the rear gate
without unlocking any doors when press-
ing the rear gate opener button
The operational/non-operational setting
for this function can be changed by
operating the combination meter display.
For details, refer to “Keyless Entry Sys-
tem” F3-47. The setting can also be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
Operational:
. Only the driver’s door will be unlocked
when the driver’s door handle is gripped.
. For Outback, the rear gate will open,
but the other doors will remain locked
when the rear gate opener button is
pressed.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-18
(125,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Non-operational:
. All doors and the rear gate will be
unlocked when the driver’s door handle is
gripped.
. For Outback, the rear gate will open
and all doors will be unlocked when the
rear gate opener button is pressed.
The factory setting (default setting) is set
as “operational”.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
S02AP12
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Keyless Entry System” F3-47.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
& Selecting hazard warning
flasher operation
S02AP18
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the combination
meter display. For details, refer to “Keyless
Entry System” F3-47. The setting can also
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator
S02AP06
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
warning indicator of the keyless access
with push-button start system” F3-25.
& Disabling keyless access
function
S02AP07
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the key-
less access function can be disabled.
WARNING
If you have an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per-
form the procedure “By operating
the driver’s door” F2-20 to disable
the keyless access function. If you
perform the procedure “By operat-
ing the access key fob” F2-20, the
operation of an implanted pace-
maker or implanted defibrillator
may be affected by the radio waves
from the transmitter antenna.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting engine”
F9-20.
. We recommend that you disable the
keyless access functions under the
following conditions.
– When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of
time
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-19
2
(126,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
– When the keyless access func-
tions are not going to be used
! Disabling functions
S02AP0701
! By operating the access key fob
S02AP070102
If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
Code Access, you can disable the keyless
access function by operating the access
key fob. For details about registering a PIN
code, refer to “Registering a PIN code”
F2-23.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”
button on the access key fob simulta-
neously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
! By operating the driver’s door
S02AP070101
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door.
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the
power door locking switch.
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
performed, open the driver’s door.
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
5. Within 10 seconds after step 4 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door twice.
6. Within 10 seconds after step 5 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-20
(127,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door once.
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is
performed, close the door.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
functions will be disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door
locking switch firmly. If the switch is not
pressed firmly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
S02AP0702
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will
be heard, and the functions are enabled.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the proce-
dure in the same manner you disabled
the function (for example, when dis-
abling by operating the driver’s door,
the function will not be enabled even if
you operate the access key fob).
. Press the push-button ignition
switch if you do not know the proce-
dure in which the keyless access func-
tion was disabled.
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: a chirp will not be
heard
– When disabling by operating the
access key fob: a chirp will be heard
& When access key fob does
not operate properly
S02AP08
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” F9-19.
& Replacing battery of access
key fob
S02AP09
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key
fob” F11-50.
& Replacing access key fob
S02AP13
Access key fobs can be replaced at
SUBARU dealers. For more details, con-
tact a SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system
S02AP14
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHK
FCC ID: Y8PFJ17–1
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push-button start system
2-21
2
(128,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Canada-spec. models . Mexico-spec. models
IFT
RLVDE1415-1661
14AHK
DENSO
PIN Code Access (models
with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
S02AR
1) Trunk opener button (Legacy)
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
2-22
(129,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Rear lock button (Outback)
While all doors (for Outback, including the
rear gate) are locked, you can unlock the
doors (including rear gate) without a key by
performing the following procedure.
. Legacy: press the trunk opener button
. Outback: press the rear lock button
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
& Registering a PIN code
S02AR01
! Preparation
S02AR0101
1. Turn off the ignition switch.
2. Close all doors (including trunk/rear
gate).
3. Press and hold the “
” button on the
access key fob. Then all doors (including
rear gate) will be locked.
4. Keep the “
” button pressed, and
press the following button within 5 seconds
after step 3.
. Legacy: the trunk opener button
. Outback: the rear lock button
5. Press and hold the above button for
more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will
sound.
6. Press the “
” button on the access key
fob while the chirp sounds.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara-
tion is complete.
NOTE
If you do not press the “ ” button on
the access key fob, the chirp will sound
for 30 seconds. In this case, the pre-
paration for registering a PIN code does
not complete even if the chirp stops.
! Registration
S02AR0102
For example, to register “32468” as the
PIN code, perform the following proce-
dure.
Legacy:
1. Press the trunk opener button three
times.
2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button twice.
3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button four times.
4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button six times.
5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button eight times.
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buzzer
starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the PIN code will be registered.
Outback:
1. Press the rear lock button three times.
2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button twice.
3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button four times.
4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button six times.
5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
2-23
2
(130,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
press the rear lock button eight times.
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buzzer
starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors (including rear gate) will be
unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code
will be registered.
NOTE
. Press the trunk opener button/rear
lock button ten times to enter “0”.
. Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the PIN
code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “
”
or “
” button on the access key fob.
Then, start over from the procedure
described in “Preparation”.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register “00000” to “99999”
or “12345” as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.
Doing so will increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”, the
registered PIN code will be deleted. You
cannot unlock the doors by PIN Code
Access until a new code is registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function is
disabled by operating the access key
fob.
. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-
lowing case.
– when you forget the PIN code
– when you want to change the PIN
code
& Unlocking
S02AR02
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis-
tration”.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– when the access key fob is within
the operating ranges
– when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
. If you make an operation error dur-
ing the unlocking procedure, start over
with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
are entered five times continuously. If
this occurs, you cannot unlock the
doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)
2-24
(131,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Remote keyless entry system
S02AE
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitter on an airplane, do not
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, the access
key is used as the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system. For models
without “keyless access with push-button
start system”, the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system is located
inside the key head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate for Outback) without a key
. Opening the trunk lid (Legacy) without
key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-29.
The operable distance of the remote key-
less entry system is approximately 30 feet
(10 meters). However, this distance will
vary depending on environmental condi-
tions. The system’s operable distance will
be shorter in areas near a facility or
electronic equipment emitting strong radio
waves such as a power plant, broadcast
station, TV tower, or remote controller of
home electronic appliances.
& Operating the access key fob
S02AE22
NOTE
The remote keyless entry system will
not be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
Access key fob
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
! Locking the doors
S02AE2201
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
and rear gate (Outback). When the doors
(including the rear gate) are locked, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
2-25
2
(132,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) is not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear
gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
. an electronic chirp sounds five times.
. the hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then the following will occur.
. an electronic chirp sounds once.
. the hazard warning flashers flash once.
! Unlocking the doors
S02AE2202
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors
and the rear gate (Outback), briefly press
the unlock/disarm button a second time
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
! Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)
S02AE2203
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
! Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)
S02AE2204
Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock
the rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers will
flash twice.
! Selecting audible signal operation
S02AE2209
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked. If desired, you can
turn the audible signal off by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Keyless Entry System” F3-47.
Furthermore, the volume setting of the
audible signal can also be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
! Selecting hazard warning flasher
operation
S02AE2210
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the combination
meter display. For details, refer to “Keyless
Entry System” F3-47. The setting can also
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Vehicle finder function
S02AE2205
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
! Sounding a panic alarm
S02AE2206
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after
approximately 30 seconds.
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
2-26
(133,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Operating the transmitter
S02AE23
NOTE
The remote keyless entry system will
not be activated when the key is
inserted in the ignition switch.
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
NOTE
For models with trunk or power rear
gate, you can disable the “
” button
on the access key fob/transmitter. We
recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer to change the setting.
! Locking the doors
S02AE2301
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
and rear gate (Outback). When the doors
(including the rear gate) are locked, an
electronic chirp will sound once and the
hazard warning flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) is not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the rear
gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
. an electronic chirp sounds five times.
. the hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automati-
cally lock and then the following will occur.
. an electronic chirp sounds once.
. the hazard warning flashers flash once.
! Unlocking the doors
S02AE2302
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all doors
and the rear gate (Outback), briefly press
the unlock/disarm button a second time
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
! Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)
S02AE2303
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
! Unlocking the rear gate (Outback)
S02AE2304
Press the rear gate unlock button to unlock
the rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers will
flash twice.
! Selecting audible signal operation
S02AE2309
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
are locked or unlocked.
If desired, the audible signal ON/OFF
setting and the audible signal volume can
be customized by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Selecting hazard warning flasher
operation
S02AE2310
Using the hazard warning flasher, the
system will give you a visible signal when
the doors are locked or unlocked. If
desired, you can turn the hazard warning
flashers off by operating the combination
meter display. For details, refer to “Keyless
Entry System” F3-47. The setting can also
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
2-27
2
(134,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
! Vehicle finder function
S02AE2305
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
! Sounding a panic alarm
S02AE2306
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. If a
button on the remote transmitter is not
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated after
approximately 30 seconds.
& Replacing the battery
S02AE08
Refer to “Replacing battery” F11-49.
& Replacing lost transmitters
S02AE09
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for security
reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Certification for remote key-
less entry system
S02AE18
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: CWTB1G077
FCC ID: CWTD1G049
CAUTION
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
. Canada-spec. models
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
2-28
(135,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Mexico-spec. models
IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814
SUBARU
MODEL: TB1G077
IFETEL RLVSUTD15-1815
SUBARU
MODEL: TD1G049
Alarm system
S02AF
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key fob.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& System alarm operation
S02AF01
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors, the rear gate/trunk lid or
engine hood remains open after the 30-
second period, the horn will continue to
sound for a maximum of 3 minutes. If the
door, the rear gate/trunk lid or engine hood
is closed while the horn is sounding, the
horn will stop sounding with a delay of up
to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening any of the doors, engine hood,
rear gate or the trunk lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models with shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Alarm system
2-29
2
(136,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Cargo area light (Outback)
The notifications regarding the map
lights, dome light and cargo area light
(Outback) are deactivated as the fac-
tory setting. A SUBARU dealer can
activate the system. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for details.
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
S02AF02
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-33.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors (and the rear gate (Outback)).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows:
If the system was previously activated:
The odometer screen displays “ALOF” and
the horn sounds twice, indicating that the
system is now deactivated.
If the system was previously deacti-
vated:
The odometer screen displays “ALON”
and the horn sounds once, indicating that
the system is now activated.
NOTE
You may have the above setting change
done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
S02AF03
! To stop the alarm
S02AF0301
Perform any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the access key fob/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the key is not registered, the
alarm will not stop.
& Arming the system
S02AF04
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
windows and/or moonroof are open.
Always make sure that they are fully
closed before arming the system.
. When arming the system, if any of
the doors or the rear gate/trunk lid is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp
sounds five times, the hazard warning
flashers flash five times to alert you that
the doors (or the rear gate/trunk lid) are
not properly closed. When you close
the door, doors will automatically lock
and the system will automatically arm
in 30 seconds. However, the system will
not arm if the engine hood is open.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. For Legacy, if you open the trunk
using the access key fob/remote trans-
mitter’s “
” button in the surveillance
state (or the standby state), the system
will be temporarily placed in a standby
state. The system will go back to the
surveillance state in 30 seconds upon
locking the trunk.
. The system is in the standby state
for a 30-second period before arming
the system. The security indicator light
will flash at short intervals during this
Keys and doors/Alarm system
2-30
(137,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
period.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors (including the rear gate/
trunk lid) are unlocked using the
access key fob/remote transmitter.
– Doors (including the rear gate/
trunk lid) are unlocked using the
keyless access function (models
with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
– Any door (including the rear gate)
is opened.
– The ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position (models without
“keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position (mod-
els with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
! To arm the system using the access
key fob/remote transmitter
S02AF0401
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate/trunk
lid.
Access key fob
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
Transmitter
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
Security indicator light
6. Briefly press the arm button (for less
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Alarm system
2-31
2
(138,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate (Outback)) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once, and the security
indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (stand-
by time), the security indicator light will
then flash slowly (twice approximately
every 2 seconds), indicating that the
system has been armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors (rear gate or trunk lid) is
not fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, the
system will automatically arm and doors
will automatically lock.
! To arm the system using power door
locking switch
S02AF0402
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without keyless access
function)/make sure the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned off (models with
keyless access function).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid (Legacy)) are locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate
(Outback)) but leave only the driver’s door
or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
security indicator light will then flash slowly
(twice approximately every 2 seconds),
indicating that the system has been armed
for surveillance.
! To arm the system using the keyless
access function (if equipped)
S02AF0404
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped)
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate/trunk
lid.
1) Door lock sensor
Keys and doors/Alarm system
2-32
(139,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Security indicator light
6. Carry the access key fob and touch the
door lock sensor. All doors (for Outback,
including the rear gate) will lock, an
electronic chirp will sound once, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and the security indicator light will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the security in-
dicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds five
times, the hazard warning flashers flash
five times to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
When you close the door, the system will
automatically arm and doors will automa-
tically lock.
& Disarming the system
S02AF05
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press the disarm button (for less
than 2 seconds) on the access key fob/
remote transmitter.
. Carry the access key fob and perform
either of the following procedures (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener button.
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approxi-
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
! Emergency disarming
S02AF0501
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn the
ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF” to
the “ON” position with a registered key/
access key fob.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, if the ac-
cess key battery is discharged, perform
the procedure described in “Switching
power status” F9-20. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Refer
to “Replacing battery of access key
fob” F11-50.
& Valet mode
S02AF06
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the access key fob/remote trans-
mitter is used only for locking and unlock-
ing the doors and rear gate (Outback) and
panic activation.
To enter the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
30. The security indicator light will continue
to flash once every 3 seconds indicating
that the system is in the valet mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-30.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Alarm system
2-33
2
(140,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Tripped sensor identification
S02AF08
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered. Also,
the number of flashes indicates the loca-
tion of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indicator light will
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
follows:
. When a door or rear gate (Outback)
was opened: 5 times
. When the trunk (Legacy) was opened:
4 times
. When the engine hood was opened: 3
times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
& Shock sensors (dealer op-
tion)
S02AF09
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their electric
wires is cut. The alarm system causes the
horn to sound and the hazard warning
flashers to flash for a short time when the
sensed impact is weak, but it warns of a
strong impact or multiple impacts by
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard
warning flashers, both lasting approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vibra-
tion like those shown in the following
examples and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Examples:
– Vibration from construction site
– Vibration in multistory car park
– Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
ference by your SUBARU dealer.
Child safety locks
S02AG
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit on the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
“LOCK” position, the door cannot be
opened from inside. The door can only
be opened from the outside.
Keys and doors/Child safety locks
2-34
(141,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Windows
S02AH
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. For safety reasons, always carry
the key with you when leaving the
vehicle and never allow an un-
attended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
The power windows operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Power window operation
S02AH07
! Power window switches
S02AH0701
Driver’s side power window switches:
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left passenger’s window
5) For rear right passenger’s window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
Passenger’s side power window
switches:
Each passenger’s window can be con-
trolled by the power window switch located
on the door.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Windows
2-35
2
(142,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Operating the window
S02AH0702
With one-touch auto up and down
feature:
1) Automatically close*
2) Close
3) Open
4) Automatically open*
*: To stop the window halfway, operate the
switch to opposite side.
NOTE
. If you continue to hold the AUTO
switch in the down position after the
window has been fully opened, the
circuit breaker may activate for a short
time and the window may not operate.
Allow several seconds for the system
to reset without touching the switch,
and the window will begin to operate
normally on its own.
. If you continue to hold the AUTO
switch in the up position after the
window has fully closed, the circuit
breaker may open and the system may
not operate. After several seconds, the
window will be able to be opened by
holding the switch down until it is fully
opened. The AUTO function will not
operate. The window can be raised by
pulling up on the switch several times
until the window is fully closed.
To reset to normal operation, initialize
the power window to reactivate the one-
touch auto up/down function. Refer to
“Initialization of power window (win-
dows with one-touch auto up/down
function)” F2-38.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as bat-
tery or fuse replacement, the one-touch
auto up/down function will be deacti-
vated. Initialize the power window to
reactivate the one-touch auto up/down
function. Refer to “Initialization of
power window (windows with one-
touch auto up/down function)” F2-38.
Without one-touch auto up and down
feature:
1) Close
2) Open
To open:
Press the appropriate switch down and
hold it until the window reaches the desired
position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
Keys and doors/Windows
2-36
(143,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Anti-entrapment function (win-
dows with one-touch auto up/
down function)
S02AH070201
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this func-
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact similar
to that caused by trapping an object (for
example, when the vehicle encounters
a deep pothole), the anti-entrapment
function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for a
few seconds after the anti-entrapment
function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as bat-
tery or fuse replacement, the anti-
entrapment function will be deacti-
vated. Initialize the power window to
reactivate the anti-entrapment func-
tion. Refer to “Initialization of power
window (windows with one-touch auto
up/down function)” F2-38.
While closing with the one-touch auto up
function, if the window senses a substan-
tial enough object trapped between the
window and the window frame, it auto-
matically moves down slightly and stops.
! Off delay function (windows with
one-touch auto up/down function)
S02AH0705
The windows can be operated for approxi-
mately 42 seconds even after the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”
position. If a front door is opened within 42
seconds, the off delay function is can-
celed.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
S02AH0704
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock:
Press the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the lock position, the rear
passenger’s window switches at the driver
side door and the passengers’ window
switches cannot be operated.
To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Windows
2-37
2
(144,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Initialization of power window
(windows with one-touch
auto up/down function)
S02AH06
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Operate each window according to the
following procedure in order to initialize the
power window system.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
by pushing down the power window
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed com-
pletely.
Trunk lid (Legacy)
S02AI
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while the engine is running.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the trunk
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
& To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
S02AI01
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to “Open-
ing trunk (Legacy)” F2-17, “Opening the
trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-26 or “Opening the
trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-27.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, refer to
“Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-26 or
“Opening the trunk lid (Legacy)” F2-27.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk
lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
. The trunk lid can also be opened
using the key. Refer to “Trunk lid
(Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
opened” F9-21.
. Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
. Even when the trunk lid cannot be
opened using the remote keyless entry
system, you can open the trunk lid by
using the key. Refer to “Trunk lid
(Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
opened” F9-21.
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (Legacy)
2-38
(145,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Under the following conditions, the
trunk can be opened without the access
key fob.
– The trunk lock/unlock setting is
set to on.
– All doors are unlocked.
The trunk lock/unlock setting can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to change the
setting.
& To open the trunk lid from
inside
S02AI02
Press and hold the trunk lid opener switch
for more than 1 second.
& Internal trunk lid release
handle
S02AI04
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle as indicated by the
arrow on the handle. This operation
unlocks the trunk lid. Then, push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approximately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
time.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while gripping
the release handle. The handle
may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage of
the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo
cannot strike the release handle.
If the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (Legacy)
2-39
2
(146,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Inspection
S02AI0401
Perform the following steps at least twice a
year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
blade. Slide the flat-head screwdriver
blade from the slit aperture of the lock
assembly fully to the end until you hear a
click.
This places the latch in the locked position.
3. Move the release handle, from outside
the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
check if the latch is released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In that case, use the key to release the
latch, then close the trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the release
handle feels restricted or not entirely
smooth during operation, or the handle
and/or handle base is cracked, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (Legacy)
2-40
(147,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Rear gate (Outback)
S02AJ
& Manual rear gate
S02AJ04
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches” F2-9.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
less access with push-button start system”
F2-10.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-25.
To open:
Rear gate opener button
1. Unlock the rear gate.
2. Press and hold the rear gate opener
button. The rear gate will open slightly.
3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be opened due to
a discharged vehicle battery, a mal-
function in the door locking/unlocking
system or other causes, you can unlock
it by manually operating the rear gate
lock release lever. For the procedure,
refer to “Rear gate (Outback) – if the
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-21.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the handle.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while the engine is running.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also do not close the rear
gate by pulling the handle from
inside the cargo space. There is a
danger of your hand being
caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading cargo.
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-41
2
(148,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Power rear gate (if equipped)
S02AJ01
WARNING
. When operating the power rear
gate, observe the following pre-
cautions. Ignoring the precau-
tions may result in an injury (e.
g., anyone’s body is hit against
the rear gate or is caught in the
rear gate, etc.)
– Make sure there are no people
around the rear gate.
– Never let anyone get close to
the rear gate.
. When closing the rear gate, be
extremely careful to prevent any-
one’s fingers, arms, neck, head
or other objects from being
caught in the rear gate. Other-
wise, serious personal injury may
be caused by entrapment.
. After opening the rear gate on a
slope by using the power rear
gate feature, the rear gate may
close. Make sure that the rear
gate has stopped completely
after opening it.
. When leaving the vehicle, always
carry the key for safety and never
allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child operating
the power rear gate.
. The driver should be aware of and
pay careful attention to his/her
responsibilities.
. Use the power rear gate only
when the area around the rear
gate is clearly visible and when
you have checked that there is no
danger of people being caught in
the gate.
CAUTION
. When closing the rear gate after
opening it, make sure to use the
power rear gate. If you close the
rear gate manually with extra
force, the power rear gate may
be damaged.
. Do not install any accessories
other than genuine SUBARU
parts on the rear gate. If the
weight of rear gate increases
excessively, the rear gate stay
cannot support the rear gate
sufficiently when opening the
rear gate. Also, the power rear
gate may not function properly or
may malfunction.
. Do not touch the driving rod.
Doing so may result in injury or
damage.
The power rear gate operates only when
all of the following conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle is stopped completely.
. The outside temperature is within a
range from −228F to 1408F (from −308C to
608C).
. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position. Or, the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
We recommend using the power rear gate
function in most circumstances instead of
manual operation.
NOTE
. Do not press the power rear gate
button repeatedly while the power rear
gate is operating. Otherwise, the sys-
tem may ignore the button operation in
order to avoid being damaged.
. It is not possible to stop the rear gate
temporarily while opening between the
completely closed position and ap-
proximately 2 in (5 cm) open. If you
press one of the power rear gate
buttons briefly during this range, the
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-42
(149,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
rear gate will be closed.
. If the vehicle starts to move while the
power rear gate is operating, the sys-
tem sounds a buzzer and closes the
rear gate automatically. At this time, if
the system detects jamming, it will
deactivate the power rear gate and the
rear gate will not be closed. If this
occurs, close the rear gate manually.
For details, refer to “Manual rear gate”
F2-41.
. If you try to open the rear gate using
the power rear gate function immedi-
ately after closing the rear gate using
the power rear gate function, an elec-
tronic chirp will sound and the rear gate
will not open. Wait for a while before
trying to open the rear gate via the
power rear gate function.
. If either of the operating conditions
has not been satisfied while operating
the power rear gate, an electronic chirp
will sound and the power rear gate will
be deactivated. In this case, the rear
gate may stop opening or closing
suddenly.
! Operation
S02AJ0111
NOTE
. The rear gate will remain unlocked
even after closing it. Always lock the
rear gate when leaving the vehicle.
. If you cannot open/close the rear
gate by performing the operation de-
scribed here, a short electronic chirp
will sound three times (beep, beep,
beep).
! By the power rear gate button
(other than the buttons on the
rear gate)
S02AJ011101
Power rear gate button on the instrument
panel
Power rear gate button on the access key
fob
Power rear gate button on the transmitter
To open the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button
when the rear gate is closed. The rear gate
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-43
2
(150,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
will open automatically. Then an electronic
chirp and the hazard warning flashers will
operate as follows:
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the instrument panel/transmitter:
sounds and flashes twice.
. When operating the power rear gate
button on the access key fob: sounds and
flashes four times.
NOTE
. While the rear gate is locked, you
cannot open the rear gate by operating
the power rear gate button on the
instrument panel. In such a case,
unlock the rear gate before operating
the power rear gate button.
. You can disable the “
” button on
the access key fob/transmitter. We
recommend that you contact your
SUBARU dealer to change the setting.
To stop the rear gate midway:
Briefly press the power rear gate button
while the rear gate is being opened. Then
an electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close.
You can open the rear gate by pressing the
power rear gate button briefly while the
rear gate is being closed.
To close the rear gate:
Press and hold the power rear gate button.
Then an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice. If you briefly press the power rear
gate button again, the rear gate will open.
! By the buttons on the rear gate
S02AJ011102
NOTE
After performing the following proce-
dures, an electronic chirp will sound
twice and the hazard warning flashers
will flash twice.
Rear gate opener button
Power rear gate button on the inside edge
of the rear gate
To open the rear gate:
1. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, carry the ac-
cess key fob. For models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”,
unlock the rear gate.
2. Briefly press the rear gate opener
button when the rear gate is closed.
The rear gate will open automatically.
To stop the rear gate midway:
Briefly press either of the following buttons
while the rear gate is being opened.
. rear gate opener button
. power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-44
(151,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will close. You can
open the rear gate by pressing the power
rear gate button briefly while the rear gate
is being closed.
To close the rear gate:
Briefly press either of the following but-
tons.
. rear gate opener button
. power rear gate button on the inside
edge of the rear gate
If you press the power rear gate button
again, the rear gate will open.
! Manual operation
S02AJ0108
NOTE
Using the power rear gate operation is
recommended. Manual operation will
require physical effort.
The power rear gate can be closed
manually. Refer to “Manual rear gate”
F2-41.
! Memory function
S02AJ0101
Memory switch
Memory switch status
1) ON status
2) OFF status
Your desired rear gate height can be
registered.
Registration of the rear gate height:
To register the rear gate height, perform
the following procedures while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
1. Open the rear gate by using the power
rear gate function.
2. With the rear gate at the desired
height, stop it by using the power rear gate
function.
3. Press the memory switch to select the
“ON” status.
Power rear gate button on the inside edge
of the rear gate
4. With the rear gate at the desired
height, press and hold the power rear gate
button on the inside edge of the rear gate
until an electronic chirp is heard and the
– CONTINUED –
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-45
2
(152,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
hazard warning flashers flash three times.
The electronic chirp and the flashing
hazard warning flashers confirm the se-
lected rear gate height has been regis-
tered.
NOTE
. To change the registered height,
press the memory switch to select the
“OFF” status and perform the register-
ing procedure again.
. It is possible to register the height
from approximately 2 in (5 cm) or more
from the completely closed position.
Retrieval of the rear gate height:
To open the rear gate and stop it at the
registered height, perform the following
procedure.
1. Press the memory switch to select the
ON status.
2. Press and hold any of the power rear
gate switches.
Even if any of the power rear gate switches
are pressed and held while the memory
switch is in the OFF status, you can stop it
at the registered height by pressing the
memory switch to select the ON status
before the rear gate reaches the registered
height.
NOTE
The rear gate will open to the position
that is stored in the memory function
even if the rear gate is opened by the
reverse function.
! Reverse function
S02AJ0102
WARNING
. Do not let parts of your body get
caught when operating the re-
verse function. If the reverse
function does not operate for
some reason, this may lead to
serious injury or accidents.
. The reverse function may not
operate if foreign objects are
caught in the rear gate just before
it closes completely. Be careful
not to catch your fingers and
other body parts.
. The reverse function may not
operate depending on the object
shape and the manner in which it
was caught. Be careful not to
catch your fingers and other
body parts.
CAUTION
. If the reverse function is operated
3 times consecutively, automatic
opening and closing of the power
rear gate function will be can-
celed and the rear gate will stop
opening or closing suddenly.
However, the rear gate may open
or close depending on the rear
gate height when automatic op-
eration is ceased. Be careful that
the rear gate does not hit any-
one’s head or face, etc. and that
fingers and baggage, etc. are not
caught in it.
. Take care not to damage the
touch sensors. Otherwise, the
reverse function may cease to
operate.
If, while opening or closing using power
rear gate, the rear gate catches persons or
baggage or hits an obstacle, an electronic
chirp will sound 3 times and the rear gate
will operate as follows.
When opening the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically close.
When closing the rear gate: The rear
gate will automatically open.
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-46
(153,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Touch sensor
Touch sensors are attached on the left and
right edges of the rear gate. If the touch
sensors detect fingers, baggage, etc.
while closing by the power rear gate
function, an electronic chirp will sounds 3
times and the rear gate will open auto-
matically.
NOTE
When the rear gate is opened using the
reverse function, it will be opened fully
or to the height registered in the
memory function.
! Rear gate drop prevention function
S02AJ0104
If, while fully opened via the power rear
gate function, the rear gate is lowered by
the weight of snow and such, an electronic
chirp will sound and the rear gate drop
prevention function will apply braking to
the rear gate so that it prevents a rapid
closure of the rear gate.
NOTE
. If there is snow on the rear gate, only
use the power rear gate function after
removing the snow.
. If you close the rear gate manually
just after the rear gate is fully opened
using the power rear gate function, the
rear gate drop prevention function will
detect a rapid closure of the rear gate
and apply braking to the rear gate. In
this case, this is not a malfunction.
! Selecting audible signal operation
S02AJ0109
Using an electronic chirp, the power rear
gate will give you an audible signal before
starting its operation. If desired, the audi-
ble signal can be turned off by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, you can turn
the audible signal off by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Keyless Entry System” F3-47.
The ON/OFF setting of the audible signal
also works as the audible signal settings
for the “remote keyless entry system” and
the “keyless access with push-button start
system”. However, for the warning chime
such as that caused by “Reverse function”
F2-46 or “Rear gate drop prevention
function” F2-47, it cannot be set as non-
operational.
Keys and doors/Rear gate (Outback)
2-47
2
(154,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Moonroof (if equipped)
S02AK
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, you must
conform to the following instruc-
tions without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”) and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child operating
the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close,
we recommend that you have the
system checked by a SUBARU
dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Moonroof switches
S02AK02
! Tilting moonroof
S02AK0201
“UP/DOWN” switch
1) Tilting up
2) Laying down
The tilting up function will only operate
when the moonroof is fully closed. The
laying down function will only operate
when the moonroof is tilted.
Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch to tilt up the moonroof.
Press the front side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch to lay down the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been tilted or has been laid down com-
pletely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
Keys and doors/Moonroof
2-48
(155,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is lowered.
Press the switch continuously to lower
the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
S02AK0202
“OPEN/CLOSE” switch
1) Open
2) Close
Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch to open the moonroof. The sun
shade will also be opened together with
the moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a
position approximately 3 in (8 cm) away
from the fully opened position. Press the
switch again to open the moonroof com-
pletely.
Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”
switch to close the moonroof.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while opening or closing it,
momentarily press the front side or rear
side of the switch.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops of
water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
! Anti-entrapment function
S02AK0203
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
& Sun shade
S02AK05
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Keys and doors/Moonroof
2-49
2
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(159,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S03
Ignition switch (models without push-button
start system) ........................................................ 3-4
LOCK..................................................................... 3-4
ACC....................................................................... 3-5
ON......................................................................... 3-5
START ................................................................... 3-5
Key reminder chime ............................................... 3-5
Ignition switch light ............................................... 3-5
Push-button ignition switch (models with push-
button start system) ............................................ 3-6
Safety precautions ................................................. 3-6
Operating range for push-button start system ........ 3-6
Switching power status .......................................... 3-7
When access key fob does not operate properly .... 3-8
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8
Meters and gauges ................................................. 3-8
Combination meter illumination.............................. 3-8
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition switch ..... 3-9
Speedometer ......................................................... 3-9
Odometer............................................................... 3-9
Double trip meter ..................................................3-10
Tachometer...........................................................3-10
Fuel gauge............................................................ 3-11
Temperature gauge ............................................... 3-11
ECO gauge ...........................................................3-12
Warning and indicator lights................................ 3-12
Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................3-13
SRS airbag system warning light...........................3-14
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators .......................................................... 3-15
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light .................................................... 3-15
Charge warning light ............................................ 3-16
Oil pressure warning light..................................... 3-16
Engine low oil level warning indicator................... 3-16
AT OIL TEMP warning light ................................... 3-17
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S. spec.
models) ............................................................. 3-17
ABS warning light................................................. 3-18
Brake system warning light................................... 3-19
Electronic parking brake indicator light................. 3-21
Hill Holder indicator light ...................................... 3-22
Low fuel warning light .......................................... 3-22
Door open indicator.............................................. 3-22
Windshield washer fluid warning light................... 3-22
All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................ 3-22
Power steering warning light ................................ 3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ........ 3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ....... 3-24
Warning chimes and warning indicator of the
keyless access with push-button start system
(if equipped) ...................................................... 3-25
Security indicator light.......................................... 3-29
Select lever/gear position indicator ....................... 3-30
Turn signal indicator lights ................................... 3-30
High beam indicator light...................................... 3-30
High beam assist indicator (green) (if equipped) ... 3-30
Instruments and controls
3
(160,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
High beam assist warning indicator (yellow)
(if equipped) .......................................................3-30
Cruise control indicator ........................................ 3-30
Cruise control set indicator ................................... 3-31
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(models with LED headlights)..............................3-31
LED headlight warning light (models with LED
headlights)..........................................................3-31
Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/
Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)................................................3-31
Headlight indicator light ........................................3-31
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ............3-31
X-MODE indicator (if equipped) .............................3-31
Hill descent control indicator (if equipped) ............3-31
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped).............3-31
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ..................3-32
Icy road surface warning indicator ........................ 3-32
RAB warning indicator (if equipped)......................3-32
RAB OFF indicator (if equipped)............................3-32
Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator (if equipped) ....3-32
Information display ............................................... 3-32
Climate control mode indicators............................3-33
Outside temperature indicator ............................... 3-33
Clock ...................................................................... 3-34
Setting the display format (12h/24h) ......................3-34
Setting the clock manually .................................... 3-35
Setting the clock automatically..............................3-36
Regulatory information..........................................3-36
Combination meter display.................................. 3-37
Basic operation .................................................... 3-38
Welcome screen (opening animation) and
Good-bye screen (ending animation).................. 3-38
Warning screen .................................................... 3-39
Basic screens....................................................... 3-39
Telltale screen ...................................................... 3-42
Menu screens....................................................... 3-43
Light control switch ............................................. 3-48
Headlights ............................................................ 3-49
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................... 3-51
High beam assist function (if equipped) ................ 3-51
Headlight flasher .................................................. 3-56
Daytime running light system ............................... 3-56
Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
(if equipped) ....................................................... 3-57
Headlight beam leveler (models with LED
headlights) ......................................................... 3-58
Turn signal lever ................................................... 3-58
One-touch lane changer........................................ 3-58
Illumination brightness control ........................... 3-59
Auto dimmer cancel function ................................ 3-59
Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................... 3-59
Wiper and washer................................................. 3-60
Windshield wiper and washer switches ................. 3-61
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(Outback) .......................................................... 3-63
Defogger and deicer............................................. 3-64
Instruments and controls
(161,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Mirrors ................................................................... 3-65
Inside mirror (without auto-dimming function)
(if equipped) .......................................................3-65
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(U.S.-spec. models without EyeSight system -
if equipped) ........................................................3-66
Auto-dimming mirror with HomeLink
®
(except U.S.-spec. models - if equipped).............. 3-72
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(models with EyeSight system) .......................... 3-77
Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-85
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel .............................. 3-85
Horn ....................................................................... 3-86
Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ..... 3-86
Instruments and controls
(162,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Ignition switch (models with-
out push-button start system)
S03AA
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is being
driven or towed because that will
lock the steering wheel, prevent-
ing steering control. And when
the engine is turned off, it takes a
much greater effort than usual to
steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure could re-
sult in injury to a child or others.
Children could operate the power
windows, the moonroof or other
controls or even make the vehicle
move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
S03AA01
The key can only be inserted or removed in
this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
The key can be turned from “ACC” to
“LOCK” only when the key is pushed in
while turning it (all models) and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push-button start system)
3-4
(163,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& ACC
S03AA02
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
S03AA03
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
S03AA04
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
If the engine does not start with your
registered key, pull out the key once (at this
time, the security indicator light will blink),
reinsert the key in the ignition switch and
then try to start the engine again.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
S03AA05
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime
stops when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch.
& Ignition switch light
S03AA06
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds and gradually turns off
under the following conditions.
. When the driver’s door is closed
. When the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light gradually turns off under the
following conditions.
. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
. When the doors are locked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without push-button start system)
3-5
3
(164,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Push-button ignition switch
(models with push-button
start system)
S03BG
& Safety precautions
S03BG04
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-11.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
S03BG01
Legacy
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
Outback
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key fob is not detected
within the operating range of the anten-
nas inside the vehicle, the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start
cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key fob is
outside the vehicle, if it is placed too
close to the glass, it may be possible to
switch the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key fob in
the following places. It may become
impossible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– On the rear shelf (Legacy)
– Inside the trunk (Legacy)
– At the corner of the cargo area
(Outback)
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in
“Access key fob – if access key fob
does not operate properly” F9-19. In
such a case, replace the battery im-
mediately. Refer to “Replacing battery
of access key fob” F11-50.
Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with push-button start system)
3-6
(165,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Switching power status
S03BG02
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
The power status is switched every time
the push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
switched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”,
“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine is
stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation
indicator on the push-button ignition switch
illuminates in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off
Power is turned
off.
ACC Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and ac-
cessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
CAUTION
. To prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging, do not leave
the push-button ignition switch
in the “ON” or “ACC” position for
a long time.
. To avoid a malfunction, observe
the following precautions.
– Do not spill drinks or other
liquids on the push-button
ignition switch.
– Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand
that is soiled with oil or other
contaminants.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when
the instrument panel illumination
is turned on, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-button
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Push-button ignition switch (models with push-button start system)
3-7
3
(166,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
S03BG0201
When the push-button ignition switch is left
in the “ACC” or “ON” position for approxi-
mately 1 hour, the push-button ignition
switch will be automatically switched to
“OFF” to prevent the battery from going
dead. This function is activated when the
select lever is in the “P” position.
& When access key fob does
not operate properly
S03BG03
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” F9-19.
Hazard warning flasher
S03AB
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn
other drivers when you have to park your
vehicle under emergency conditions. The
hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
press the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights
and the turn signal indicator lights will
flash. To turn off the flasher, press the
button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
S03AD
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges in the
combination meter. You will find their
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-
tion
S03AD01
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal
display illuminate.
2. The meter and gauge needles sweep
one time.
3. Dials and indicators in meters and
gauges light up.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
3-8
(167,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
This sequence of operations may not
take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
S03AD02
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. For details, perform the proce-
dures described in “Gauge Initial Move-
ment” F3-46.
& Speedometer
S03AD03
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer
S03AD04
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
Trip reset switch
If you press the trip reset switch when the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or
“ACC” position, the odometer/trip meter
will light up. If you do not press the trip
reset switch within 10 seconds of illumina-
tion of the odometer/trip meter, the od-
ometer/trip meter will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
3-9
3
(168,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Double trip meter
S03AD05
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
Trip reset switch
If you press the trip reset switch when the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or
“ACC” position, the odometer/trip meter
will light up. It is possible to switch between
the A trip meter and B trip meter indica-
tions while the odometer/trip meter is lit up.
If you do not press the trip reset switch
within 10 seconds of illumination of the
odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip reset switch.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the trip reset
switch and keep the switch pressed for
more than 2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
S03AD06
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
3-10
(169,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
to protect the engine from overrev-
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
& Fuel gauge
S03AD07
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position, the fuel gauge
shows “E” even if the fuel tank contains
fuel.
The gauge may move slightly due to fuel
level movement in the tank (e.g., during
braking, turning or acceleration).
If you press the trip reset switch while the
ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or
“ACC” position, the fuel gauge’s dial will
light up and the needle will indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
If, while the fuel gauge needle is indicating
the amount of fuel remaining in the tank,
you (a) do not press the trip reset switch for
10 seconds or (b) open and close the
driver’s door, the fuel gauge needle will
drop to the “E” position and the dial and
needle will turn off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
& Temperature gauge
S03AD08
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with the
engine coolant at this temperature range
and high revving operation when the
engine is not warmed up enough should
be avoided.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
3-11
3
(170,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
14.
& ECO gauge
S03AD12
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the average rate of fuel con-
sumption since the trip meter was last
reset and the current rate of fuel consump-
tion.
The ECO gauge indicates the current fuel
efficiency as shown in the following chart.
Displayed unit
Needle position
“+” side “-” side
MPG Better Poorer
l/100km Poorer
Better
NOTE
. The ECO gauge shows only an
approximate indication.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km). Until
that time, the ECO gauge does not
operate.
Warning and indicator lights
S03AE
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then go out
when the ignition switch is initially turned to
the “ON” position. This permits checking
the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several sec-
onds or after the engine has started:
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the seat-
belt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON /
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator light
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-12
(171,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Hill Holder indicator light
: All-Wheel Drive warning light
: Power steering warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S. spec. models)
: Low fuel warning light
: Hill descent control indicator (if
equipped)
: Automatic headlight beam leveler
warning light (if equipped)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
S03AE01
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver and
front passenger to fasten their seatbelts by
the warning lights in the locations indicated
in the following illustration and a chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
S03AE0101
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the driver’s
seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will also
sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-13
3
(172,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device to
fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Manual seat” F1-4 (models equipped
with manual seats only).
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), take
the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system and
its child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth. (Models
equipped with manual seats only)
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
S03AE02
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which may in-
crease the risk of injury.
For details about the components mon-
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-14
(173,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS
airbag system monitors” F1-69.
& Front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicators
S03AE03
NOTE
For details about the operating condi-
tions of SRS seat cushion airbag, refer
to “SRS seat cushion airbag operation”
F1-62.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located as shown in the
illustration.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indicators
remain illuminated or off simultaneously
even after the system check period, the
system is malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
spection.
& CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc-
tion indicator light
S03AE04
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that there is at least one problem or
potential problem somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
! If the light illuminates constantly
S03AE0401
If the light illuminates constantly while
driving or does not turn off after the engine
starts, an emission control system mal-
function has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-15
3
(174,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light coming on
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with
the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap
will not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/malfunction indicator light turn off
immediately. It may take several driving
trips. If the light does not turn off, take your
vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
! If the light is blinking
S03AE0402
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should conform to
the following instructions.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. Stop towing a trailer as soon as
possible (Outback).
The CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may stop blinking
and illuminate steadily after several driving
trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Charge warning light
S03AE05
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
S03AE06
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light on. This
may cause serious engine damage.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Engine low oil level
warning indicator
S03AE58
This indicator appears when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit.
If the engine low oil level warning indicator
appears while driving, park the vehicle at a
safe and level location, and then check the
engine oil level. When the engine oil level
is not within the normal range, refill with
engine oil. Refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.
If the warning indicator does not disappear
after refilling with engine oil or the warning
indicator appears even though the engine
oil level is within the normal range, have
the system checked by a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
. After replacing or adding the engine
oil, if the engine oil level is within the
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-16
(175,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
normal range when restarting the en-
gine on a level surface, the warning
indicator will be off.
. The warning indicator may appear
temporarily in the following conditions
because a low oil level may be detected
as a result of significant oil movement
in the engine.
– when the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continu-
ously accelerated and decelerated
– when the vehicle is continuously
turned
– when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates continuously
between uphill and downhill
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light
S03AE07
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warn-
ing
S03AE0701
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may indicate
that the transmission control system is not
working properly. Contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.
spec. models)
S03AE08
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will go out.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-17
3
(176,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Should the warning light illuminate steadily
after blinking for approximately one min-
ute, have the system inspected by your
nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Other-
wise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious perso-
nal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low pres-
sure threshold, the low tire pressure
warning light should turn off a few
minutes later. Therefore, be sure to
install the specified size for the front
and rear tires.
& ABS warning light
S03AE09
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportunity by your
SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-18
(177,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
after starting the vehicle.
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
brake system warning light is
off), the ABS function shuts
down; however, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates together
with the brake system warning light if the
EBD system malfunctions. For further
details of the EBD system malfunction
warning, refer to “Brake system warning
light” F3-19.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off while driving.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction. When
the battery becomes fully charged, the
light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light
S03AE10
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the brake system warning light
illuminates, the electronic park-
ing brake system may be mal-
functioning. Immediately stop
your vehicle in a safe location,
use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving
and contact your SUBARU deal-
er. For details, refer to “Electro-
nic parking brake” F7-40.
NOTE
. Even if the brake system warning
light illuminates, if the warning light
behavior is as described in the follow-
ing examples, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning.
– The warning light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is ap-
plied or released.
– The warning light turns off when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position again.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate immediately after the engine
is started. However, it is not malfunc-
tioning if the warning light turns off
after the electronic parking brake is
released.
. The brake system warning light may
illuminate after the electronic parking
brake is frequently applied and re-
leased. However, the electronic parking
brake system is not malfunctioning if
the light turns off after a short period of
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-19
3
(178,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
time.
. When the engine is started while the
electronic parking brake is applied/
released, the system may judge an
abnormal situation and the warning
light may illuminate. If the warning light
illuminates, turn the ignition switch
once to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
and then restart the engine. Then,
apply/release the electronic parking
brake. If the warning light turns off,
the system will be restored.
This light has the following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning
S03AE1002
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level of
the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in the
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
S03AE1003
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s
motion may therefore become somewhat
harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat
place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
S03AE1004
The brake system warning light illuminates
when the electronic parking brake system
is malfunctioning. If the warning light
illuminates, promptly park in a safe loca-
tion as soon as possible and contact your
SUBARU dealer.
The brake system warning light remains
illuminated when the parking brake cannot
be released even if the parking brake
switch is pushed. For details, refer to
“Electronic parking brake” F7-40.
! Frequent operation warning
S03AE100403
The brake system warning light illuminates
and a chirp sound will be heard if the
parking brake switch is operated too
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-20
(179,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
frequently. In this case, the operation of the
parking brake switch is restricted to protect
the electronic parking brake system.
& Electronic parking
brake indicator light
S03AE85
! Parking brake indicator
S03AE8501
The light illuminates with the parking brake
applied while the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. It turns off when the parking
brake is fully released.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
S03AE8502
WARNING
. When you release the electronic
parking brake while the engine is
running, the electronic parking
brake indicator light will turn off.
However, if the light still illumi-
nates, stop the vehicle in a safe
location immediately and have
the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
. If the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, the elec-
tronic parking brake system may
be malfunctioning. Immediately
stop your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion, use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing and contact your SUBARU
dealer. For details, refer to “Elec-
tronic parking brake” F7-40.
NOTE
. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
electronic parking brake applied, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated for approximately
30 seconds and then turns off.
. When the electronic parking brake
switch is pulled to apply the electronic
parking brake while the ignition switch
is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, the
electronic parking brake indicator light
illuminates, remains illuminated for
approximately 30 seconds and then
turns off.
. Even if the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes, if the warning
light behavior is as described in the
following examples, the electronic
parking brake system is not malfunc-
tioning.
– The indicator light turns off when
the electronic parking brake is re-
leased.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash immediately after the
engine is started. However, it is not
malfunctioning if the indicator light
turns off after the electronic parking
brake is released.
. The electronic parking brake indica-
tor light may flash after the electronic
parking brake is frequently applied and
released. However, the electronic park-
ing brake system is not malfunctioning
if the light turns off after a short period
of time.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes when the electronic parking brake
system is malfunctioning. If the indicator
light flashes, promptly park in a safe
location as soon as possible and contact
your SUBARU dealer.
The electronic parking brake indicator light
remains illuminated when the parking
brake cannot be released even if the
parking brake switch is pushed. For de-
tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake”
F7-40.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-21
3
(180,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-
ing
S03AE850201
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated when the parking brake cannot
be applied.
! Frequent operation warning
S03AE850202
The electronic parking brake indicator light
flashes for 10 seconds and a chirp sound
will be heard if the parking brake switch is
operated too frequently. In this case, the
operation of the parking brake switch is
restricted to protect the electronic parking
brake system.
NOTE
Wait until the indicator light turns off.
& Hill Holder indicator
light
S03AE60
WARNING
If the Hill Holder indicator light does
not illuminate even when the Hill
Holder switch is pressed to activate
the Hill Holder function, the electro-
nic parking brake system may be
malfunctioning. Immediately stop
the vehicle in a safe location and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
The light illuminates when the Hill Holder
switch is pressed to activate the Hill Holder
function. For details about the Hill Holder
function, “Hill Holder function” F7-42.
& Low fuel warning
light
S03AE11
The low fuel warning light illuminates when
the tank is nearly empty approximately 2.6
US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp gal). It only
operates when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
& Door open indicator
S03AE61
When any of the doors, the rear gate
(Outback) or the trunk lid (Legacy) is not
fully closed, the door open indicator
appears. This function is effective even if
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF”
or “ACC” position (all models) or the key is
removed from the ignition switch (models
without “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
The open door is indicated by the corre-
sponding part of the door open indicator.
Always make sure this indicator does not
appear before you start to drive.
& Windshield washer
fluid warning light
S03AE42
This light appears when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank de-
creases to the lower limit (approximately
1.0 US qt, 0.9 liter, 0.8 Imp qt).
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light
S03AE13
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe location and then check
whether all four tires are the same
diameter and whether any of the
tires has a puncture or has lost air
pressure for some other reason.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-22
(181,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of the
temporary spare tire should therefore
be restricted to the minimum time
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure excessively
low in any of its tires.
& Power steering warning
light
S03AE53
While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steer-
ing system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
that may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light/Vehi-
cle Dynamics Control
operation indicator
light
S03AE14
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
S03AE1401
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
becomes inoperative, causing the
warning light to illuminate. Although
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control
and ABS are inoperative in this case,
the ordinary functions of the brake
system are still available. You will be
safe while driving in this condition,
but drive carefully and have your
vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-23
3
(182,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately and remains off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light
S03AE1402
The indicator light flashes during activation
of the skid suppression function and during
activation of the traction control function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after the
lapse of several minutes (the engine has
warmed up) after the engine has started.
& Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol OFF indicator light
S03AE15
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-24
(183,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator of the keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system (if equipped)
S03AE55
Access key warning indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system is equipped with a warning chime
and the access key warning indicator in
order to minimize improper operations and
help protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator appears, take the
appropriate action.
You cannot turn the warning chimes off.
However, the volume setting of the outside
warning chime can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARU
dealer for details.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indica-
tor on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. Even when the access key fob is
within the operating ranges inside the
vehicle, the access key warning for
engine start may be provided depend-
ing on the status of the access key fob
and the environmental conditions.
. When the access key fob is taken out
of the vehicle through an open window,
the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
! List of warnings
S03AE5504
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-25
3
(184,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
— —
The driver’s door is opened while the push-
button ignition switch is “ACC” and the select
lever is in the “P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to switch
the push-button ignition switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch is switched
to “OFF” while the driver’s door is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Lockout warning:
An attempt was made to lock all doors using
the power door locking switch or access key
fob while the access key fob is left inside the
vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
*The doors cannot be locked while the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all doors will
be unlocked.
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
—
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
push-button ignition switch is “OFF” and the
access key fob is inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key fob from the vehicle,
and lock the doors.
*If the access key fob is inside the vehicle, the
doors cannot be locked.
—
Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep
(5 times)
—
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” position and
one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened.
Close the doors securely and lock them.
*If one of the doors including the rear gate is
opened, the doors cannot be locked.
Ding
Long beep (60
seconds max.)
—
Power warning:
The door lock sensor is touched while you
are carrying the access key fob, the push-
button ignition switch is in a position other
than “OFF” and the select lever is in the “P”
position.
Return the access key fob inside the vehicle,
or switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”.
*If the push-button ignition switch is not
switched to “OFF”, the doors cannot be
locked.
Ding,
ding ...
(7 seconds)
— —
Access key warning:
The vehicle is driven while the access key fob
is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and drive the
vehicle.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-26
(185,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding — —
Access key warning for engine start:
The push-button ignition switch is pressed
while the access key fob is not inside the
vehicle.
Carry the access key fob, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access
key fob and closes the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in the
“P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
—
Passenger access key takeout warning:
A fellow passenger exits the vehicle with the
access key fob and closes a door other than
the driver’s door while the push-button
ignition switch is in a position other than
“OFF”.
Return the access key fob to inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”.
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
—
Access key takeout without “P” position
warning:
The driver exits the vehicle with the access
key fob and closes the driver’s door while the
push-button ignition switch is in a position
other than “OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P” position,
switch the push-button ignition switch to
“OFF” and exit the vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
— —
Select lever position warning:
. Case 1: The engine is turned off by
pressing the push-button ignition switch
while the select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. Case 2: The driver’s door is opened
while the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other than the
“P” position.
. Case 1: Start the engine, shift the
select lever to the “P” position, switch the
push-button ignition switch to “OFF” and
exit the vehicle.
. Case 2: Shift the select lever to the
“P” position, switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-27
3
(186,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Operation indica-
tor on push-button
ignition switch
Status Action
Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key.
Ding —
Flashes in green
(15 seconds max.)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure is performed, but
the steering is still locked.
While turning the steering wheel right and left
lightly, depress the brake pedal and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding — Flashes in orange
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction is detected in the power
system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immediately and
have the vehicle inspected.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-28
(187,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Security indicator light
S03AE16
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation of
the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
S03AE1601
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system” F2-
29.
! Immobilizer system
S03AE1602
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The engine is not running.
– In the event that an unauthorized
key is used (for example, the key is
unregistered or the ID code does not
match), the power is not switched to
“ON” and the security indicator light
continues blinking.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunction-
ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates. For details about the immobilizer
system, refer to “Immobilizer” F2-4.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. It means
that the matching of the ID code is
completed and the immobilizer system
is deactivated, and it does not indicate
a malfunction.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
– while the engine is running
– the push-button ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the driver’s
door has not been opened or closed
Models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– while the engine is running
– for approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned
from the “ON” position to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position
– when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
. Even if a malfunction occurs, such
as the security indicator light flashes
irregularly, it will not affect the func-
tionality of the immobilizer system.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-29
3
(188,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Select lever/gear position in-
dicator
S03AE43
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
The select lever position is displayed on
the indicator.
! Upshift/downshift indicator
S03AE4305
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator (which shows the
current gear selection) and the upshift/
downshift indicator light up. Refer to
“Selection of manual mode” F7-27.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
S03AE20
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-40.
& High beam indicator
light
S03AE21
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
operating the headlight flasher.
& High beam assist indi-
cator (green) (if
equipped)
S03AE83
This indicator appears when the high
beam assist function is activated. For
details about the high beam assist func-
tion, refer to “High beam assist function”
F3-51.
& High beam assist
warning indicator
(yellow) (if equipped)
S03AE84
This warning indicator appears when the
high beam assist function malfunctions.
When this warning indicator appears, have
your vehicle inspected by your SUBARU
dealer.
& Cruise control indicator
S03AE22
This indicator appears when the cruise
control main button is pressed to activate
the cruise control function. For details,
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-46.
If this light blinks, do not use the cruise
control. In addition, if it blinks frequently,
contact your SUBARU dealer for an
inspection.
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light illumi-
nates, the cruise control indicator
flashes at the same time. At this
time, do not drive at high speed and
have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-30
(189,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Cruise control set indi-
cator
S03AE23
This indicator appears when vehicle speed
has been set to use the cruise control
function.
& Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (models with LED
headlights)
S03AE33
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
& LED headlight warning
light (models with LED
headlights)
S03AE76
This light illuminates if the LED headlights
malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
& Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light/
Steering Responsive
Headlight OFF indicator
light (if equipped)
S03AE89
This light illuminates when the Steering
Responsive Headlight function is off. Also,
the light flashes when a malfunction
occurs in the Steering Responsive Head-
light. Refer to “Steering Responsive Head-
light (SRH)” F3-57.
& Headlight indicator
light
S03AE24
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. when the light switch is turned to the
“
” or “ ” position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
S03AE25
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
& X-MODE indicator (if
equipped)
S03AE68
This indicator appears while the X-MODE
is activated. It will disappear when the X-
MODE is deactivated.
& Hill descent control in-
dicator (if equipped)
S03AE69
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in standby. It will
flash while the hill descent control function
is operating. It will disappear when the hill
descent control function is not available.
& BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
S03AE80
This warning indicator appears on the
combination meter display when the BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) or RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert) is not functioning for
any reason. For further details, refer to
“BSD/RCTA warning indicator” F7-55. If
this indicator remains displayed, have your
vehicle inspected by your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
3-31
3
(190,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor (if equipped)
S03AE86
This indicator appears on the combination
meter display when the BSD/RCTA OFF
switch is pressed to deactivate the BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) and RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert), or when the BSD/
RCTA is suspended temporarily. For de-
tails, refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch” F7-
56.
& Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
S03AE82
When the outside temperature is 378F
(38C) or less, the icy road surface warning
indicator will illuminate to inform the driver
that the road surface may be frozen.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature in the area
around the sensor. Therefore, the tem-
perature indication may differ from the
actual outside air temperature.
. The icy road surface warning indi-
cator should be treated only as a guide.
Be sure to check the condition of the
road surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
indicator appears, it will not disappear
unless the outside temperature has
increased to 418F (58C) or higher.
& RAB warning
indicator (if equipped)
S03AE91
This indicator illuminates if the Reverse
Automatic Braking System malfunctions.
Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking
System” F7-59.
& RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
S03AE92
This indicator illuminates when the Re-
verse Automatic Braking System is turned
OFF, or when the Reverse Automatic
Braking System is suspended temporarily.
Refer to “Reverse Automatic Braking
System” F7-59.
& Sonar audible alarm
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
S03AE93
This indicator illuminates when the sonar
audible alarm is turned OFF. For the
setting procedure, refer to “Sonar Audible
Alarm” F3-46.
Information display
S03AZ
1) Clock
2) Climate control mode indicators
3) Outside temperature indicator
With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the clock appears on the display.
With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion, the outside temperature indicator,
climate control mode indicators and clock
appear on the display.
Instruments and controls/Information display
3-32
(191,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Climate control mode indica-
tors
S03AZ11
Models with manual climate control sys-
tem
1) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator
2) Air conditioner ON indicator
3) Airflow mode indicator
4) Air inlet selection ON indicator
Models with automatic climate control
system
1) Set temperature indicator (driver’s side)
2) Set temperature indicator (front passen-
ger’s side)
3) FULL AUTO indicator
4) Auto indicator
5) Airflow mode indicator
6) Fan speed indicator
7) Air conditioner ON indicator
8) Maximum air conditioner ON indicator
& Outside temperature indica-
tor
S03AZ01
1) U.S. spec. models
2) Except U.S. spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C).
. The indicator may give a false reading
under any of the following conditions:
– When the sensor is exposed in
direct sun light.
– When idling; when running at low
speeds in a traffic jam, or when the
engine is restarted immediately follow-
ing a shut-down.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
Instruments and controls/Information display
3-33
3
(192,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Clock
S03AF
The clock shows the time while the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For
models with a SUBARU genuine naviga-
tion and/or audio system, the clock can be
adjusted using either auto mode or manual
mode.
. Auto mode: automatic clock adjustment
. Manual mode: manual clock adjust-
ment
& Setting the display format
(12h/24h)
S03AF05
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
Control switch
1)
2) /SET
3)
2. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switch to display
the menu screen entering screen.
Menu screen entering screen
3. While displaying the menu screen
entering screen, pull and hold the
“
/SET” switch on the steering wheel.
The screen goes to setting menu.
4. Select “Clock”.
5. Select “Display Format”.
6. Select either the 12-hour or 24-hour
format by pulling the “
”, “ ” switches.
7. After selecting the format, pull and hold
the “
/ SET” switch. The selected format
will be set.
Instruments and controls/Clock
3-34
(193,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Setting the clock manually
S03AF03
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Press the button.
3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then
select “Manual”.
Control switch
1)
2) /SET
3)
6. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switch to scroll the
displaying items, and display the menu
screen entering screen.
Menu screen entering screen
7. While displaying the menu screen
entering screen, pull and hold the “
/
SET” switch on the steering wheel. The
screen goes to setting menu.
8. Select “Clock” of the setting screen.
9. Select “Adjust Time”.
NOTE
If the “Clock adjustment” is not in
manual mode, “Adjust Time” will not
be displayed. Be sure to perform steps
2 through 5.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Clock
3-35
3
(194,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
10. Pull the “ ” or “ ” switches to adjust
the hour.
11. After adjusting the hour, pull and hold
the “
/ SET” switch. The hour will be set
and it automatically goes to the minute
adjustment.
12. Pull the “
” or “ ” switches to adjust
the minute.
13. After adjusting the minute, pull and
hold the “
/ SET” switch. The minute will
be set and time adjustment will complete.
& Setting the clock automati-
cally
S03AF02
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Press the button.
3. Select “Settings”.
4. Select “Vehicle”.
5. Select “Clock adjustment” and then
select “Auto”.
! Models with navigation system
S03AF0201
The clock will be set automatically where a
GPS signal is available.
! Models without navigation system
S03AF0202
The clock will be set and adjusted auto-
matically when a smartphone is connected
via Bluetooth
®
for transferring phonebook
data.
1. Register the smartphone to the audio
system. For details, refer to “Bluetooth
SETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-
tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-
TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’s
Manual for the audio/navigation system.
The clock will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE
Depending on the model of smart-
phone, the settings of the connected
smartphone may need to be changed.
(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-
tion settings may need to be activated.)
For details, check the instructions on
connecting smartphones.
& Regulatory information
S03AF04
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
Instruments and controls/Clock
3-36
(195,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Combination meter display
S03BK
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
combination meter display while
the vehicle is in motion. When
operation of the combination meter
display interferes with your ability to
concentrate on driving, stop the
vehicle before performing opera-
tions on the screen. Also, do not
concentrate on the display while
driving. Doing so may cause you to
look away from the road and could
result in an accident.
Various information will be shown on the
combination meter display. Also, a warn-
ing message will appear on the display if a
malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
several settings for the displayed content
can be performed.
Combination meter display
1) ECO gauge (refer to “ECO gauge” F3-
12.)
2) Basic screen/Warning screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-39 and “Warning
screen” F3-39.)
3) Cruise control information display
4) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
to “Select lever/gear position indicator”
F3-30.)
5) Telltale screen (refer to “Telltale screen”
F3-42.)
6) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-9.)/
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip
meter” F3-10.)
Control switch
1) Up (select)
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-37
3
(196,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Basic operation
S03BK01
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “
/SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the “
” information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with “
” on the display,
pull the “
/SET” switch on the steering
wheel toward you.
& Welcome screen (opening
animation) and Good-bye
screen (ending animation)
S03BK08
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed after unlocking the door, the wel-
come screen (opening animation) will
appear on the combination meter display
for approximately 20 seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combination
meter display gradually turns off with
showing Good-bye screen (ending anima-
tion).
NOTE
. The welcome screen and the good-
bye screen may differ in the actual
words and appearance.
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears, it
takes a certain period of time to display
it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the driver’s door, the
welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and
closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry system
(all models) or the keyless access
function (if equipped) while the wel-
come screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors (including the rear
gate) is opened while the welcome
screen is displayed, the door ajar
warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to on
or off. For details, refer to “Welcome
Screen” F3-46.
. The Good-bye screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Good-bye
Screen” F3-46.
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-38
(197,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Warning screen
S03BK05
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear for
approximately 5 seconds. Take the appro-
priate actions based on the messages
indicated.
Journey time alert screen
NOTE
The journey time alert screen will
appear 2 hours after the ignition switch
is turned on. When you see this screen,
it is recommended that you take a rest
from driving.
& Basic screens
S03BK06
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the screen
that is always displayed.
Default screen:
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-39
3
(198,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Clock and outside temperature screen:
This screen displays the clock and the
outside temperature.
Average fuel consumption screen:
: Fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Current fuel consumption screen:
: Fuel consumption
: Driving range on remaining fuel
This screen displays the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-40
(199,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Driving information screen:
: Journey time
: Journey distance
This screen displays the journey time (the
time that has elapsed since the ignition
switch was turned to the “ON” position)
and journey distance (the distance that
has been driven since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position).
Digital speed screen:
This screen displays the current vehicle
speed.
TPMS screen (if equipped):
This screen displays each tire pressure.
When a tire is deflated, the deflated tire
and the tire pressure will be displayed on
the screen in yellow.
NOTE
The tire pressure values are displayed
several minutes after driving.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-41
3
(200,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Multi Media Link screen:
Example
This screen shows the audio, navigation,
compass, and other information (if avail-
able for navigation and compass).
Menu screen entering screen:
While this screen is selected, pull and hold
the “
/SET” switch to enter the menu
screen.
& Telltale screen
S03BK09
1) Telltale screen
When the corresponding situation occurs,
the following telltales will be displayed on
the telltale screen.
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-42
(201,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Mark Name Page
Door open indicator 3-22
LED headlight warning
indicator (if equipped)
3-31
High beam assist indi-
cator (green) (if
equipped)
3-30
Engine low oil level
warning indicator
3-16
BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-31
BSD/RCTA OFF indi-
cator (if equipped)
3-32
Steering Responsive
Headlight warning light
(if equipped)
3-31
High beam assist warn-
ing indicator (yellow) (if
equipped)
3-30
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
3-22,
3-62,
11-31
Hill descent control in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-31
Mark Name Page
Icy road surface warn-
ing indicator
3-32
Access key warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
3-25
RAB warning indicator
(if equipped)
3-32
RAB OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-32
Sonar audible alarm
OFF indicator (if
equipped)
3-32
& Menu screens
S03BK07
Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enter
the menu screens when all of the following
conditions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
By operating the “
” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can select the menu.
Pull the “
/SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
NOTE
If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the
system will return to the previous
screen.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-43
3
(202,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The menu list is as follows.
First menu
Second menu
Third menu Settings
Clock Display Format
—
12-hour/24-hour
Adjust Time (if not set automatically)
—
3-46
Screen Settings Welcome Screen
—
. ON (with sound)
. ON (without sound)
. OFF
Good-bye Screen
—
ON/OFF
Gauge Initial Movement
—
ON/OFF
Units
—
. km, km/h, Liter
. miles, MPH, Gallon
Tire Pressure Units
—
kPa/psi
Languages
—
. English
. Spanish
. French
SRH (if equipped) —
—
OFF/ON
Combination Meter Illumination (if
equipped)
Meter Ring Illumination
—
ON/OFF
EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
Warning Volume
—
Max/Mid/Min
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
—
ON/OFF
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Func-
tion
—
ON/OFF
Vehicle Icon
—
ON/OFF
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) Warning Volume
—
Max/Mid/Min
RAB (if equipped) Warning Volume
—
Max/Mid/Min
Sonar Audible Alarm
—
ON/OFF
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-44
(203,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
First menu
Second menu
Third menu Settings
Vehicle Setting Keyless Entry System
Audible Signal*
1
ON/OFF
Hazard Warning Flasher
ON/OFF
Driver Door Unlock*
1
*
2
Driver Door Only, All
Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock*
1
*
2
*
3
Rear Gate Only, All
Defogger
—
15 minutes/Continuous
Interior Light
—
10 seconds – 30 seconds, OFF
Auto Door Lock and Unlock
Auto Door Lock
Off/Vehicle Speed/Shift Into or Out
of PARK
Auto Door Unlock
Off/Shift Into or Out of PARK/Ignition
OFF/Driver Door Open
Auto Headlights
Light Sensitivity
Max/Mid/Low/Min
Wiper Link
ON/OFF
Welcome Lighting
Approaching Time Set
30 seconds – 90 seconds, OFF
Leaving Time Set
30 seconds – 90 seconds, OFF
Default Settings OK To Reset?
—
Yes/No
*1: The setting menu is available only for models with “keyless access with push-button start system”.
*2: The setting can only be changed for the “keyless access” entry function. For details, refer to “Door unlock selection function” F2-18.
*3: For Outback only
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-45
3
(204,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Clock
S03BK0715
This menu can be used to set the clock
settings.
! Display Format
S03BK071501
Set to 12-hour or 24-hour display.
! Adjust Time (if not set automati-
cally)
S03BK071502
Set the time.
! Screen Settings
S03BK0701
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Welcome Screen
S03BK070105
The welcome screen can be activated or
deactivated. Select “On (with Sound)” to
activate the screen and sound. Select “On
(without Sound)” to activate the screen
and deactivate the sound. Select “Off” to
deactivate the screen.
! Good-bye Screen
S03BK070106
The Good-bye screen can be activated or
deactivated. Select “On” to activate the
screen. Select “Off” to deactivate the
screen.
! Gauge Initial Movement
S03BK070102
The movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that occurs when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position can be activated or deactivated.
Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to
deactivate.
! Units
S03BK070108
You can select the displayed units of the
distance, vehicle speed and volume. Op-
erate the “
” or “ ” switch on the steering
wheel to display the preferred units. Then
pull the “
/SET” switch to select the
displayed units.
! Tire Pressure Unit (if equipped)
S03BK070109
Change the units displayed in the Tire
Pressure Monitoring system.
! Languages
S03BK070103
Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel to display the preferred
language. Then pull the “
/SET” switch to
select the displayed language.
! SRH (if equipped)
S03BK0714
The Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
can be set to on or off.
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
S03BK0702
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
! BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
S03BK0710
After entering the “BSD/RCTA” menu,
select the “Warning Volume” menu. You
can set the volume of the warning buzzer
for RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You
can select “Max”, “Mid” or “Min”.
! RAB (if equipped)
S03BK0712
After entering the “RAB” menu, select one
of the following menus.
NOTE
For models with RAB (Reverse Auto-
matic Braking) system, refer to “Re-
verse Automatic Braking System” F7-
59.
! Warning Volume
S03BK071203
The volume of the warning buzzer that
sounds when the RAB (Reverse Auto-
matic Braking) system is in operation can
be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid” and “Min”).
! Sonar Audible Alarm
S03BK071204
When the RAB (Reverse Automatic Brak-
ing) system is in operation, the buzzer that
sounds if an obstacle is detected in the
rear or if detection is not possible can be
activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to deac-
tivate the buzzer.
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-46
(205,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Vehicle Setting
S03BK0708
After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Keyless Entry System
S03BK070801
After entering the “Keyless Entry System”
menu, select one of the following menus.
. Audible Signal (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”):
The audible signal can be activated or
deactivated. Select “On” to activate. Select
“Off” to deactivate.
. Hazard Warning Flasher:
The hazard warning flasher operation can
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate. Select “Off” to deactivate.
. Driver Door Unlock (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”):
The door unlock selection function is
available for the “keyless access” entry
function. For details, refer to “Door unlock
selection function” F2-18. On this setting
menu, the door unlock selection function
for the driver’s door can be customized.
Select “Driver Door Only” to set as
“Operational”. Select “All” to set as “Non-
operational”.
. Rear Gate Unlock (Outback with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”):
The door unlock selection function is
available for the “keyless access” entry
function. For details, refer to “Door unlock
selection function” F2-18. On this setting
menu, the door unlock selection function
for the rear gate can be customized. Select
“Rear Gate/Trunk Only” to set as “Opera-
tional”. Select “All” to set as “Non-opera-
tional”.
! Defogger
S03BK070802
The defogger and deicer system can be
set for the continuous operation mode or
automatic shut-off mode. Select “Contin-
uous” to select the continuous operation
mode. Select “15 minutes” to select the
automatic shut-off mode.
! Interior Light
S03BK070803
The setting for the period of time in which
the interior lights remain on (OFF delay
timer) after closing the doors and/or the
rear gate can be set or customized. Select
the preferred seconds to customize the
operation period. Select “Off” to deactivate
the OFF delay timer.
! Auto Door Lock and Unlock
S03BK070808
Setting conditions for Auto Door Lock and
Unlock
. Auto Door Lock:
Set the condition of the following items to
lock the door automatically.
– Vehicle Speed: When the vehicle
speed reaches more than 12 mph (20
km/h).
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the
select lever is shifted into a position
other than the “P” position.
– Off: When the function is set to OFF.
. Auto Door Unlock:
Set the conditions of the following items to
unlock the door automatically.
– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When the
select lever is shifted into the “P”
position.
– Ignition OFF: When the ignition
switch is turned to OFF.
– Driver Door Open: When the dri-
ver’s door is open.
– Off: When the function is set to OFF.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Combination meter display
3-47
3
(206,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Auto Headlights
S03BK070805
. Light Sensitivity:
The operational sensitivity of the auto on/
off headlights can be set. You can select
“Max”, “Mid”, “Low” or “Min”.
. Wiper Link:
The automatic headlight turn on function
that is linked with the wiper operation can
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate. Select “Off” to deactivate.
! Welcome Lighting
S03BK070806
After entering the “Welcome Lighting”
menu, select either of the following menus.
. Approaching Time Set:
The setting for the period of time in which
the low beam headlights remain on when
approaching the vehicle can be set or
customized. Select the preferred seconds
to customize the operation period. Select
“Off” to deactivate the welcome lighting
function when approaching.
. Leaving Time Set:
The setting for the period of time in which
the low beam headlights remain on when
exiting the vehicle can be set or custo-
mized. Select the preferred seconds to
customize the operation period. Select
“Off” to deactivate the welcome lighting
function when exiting.
! Default Settings
S03BK0704
Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings to the factory
default settings. Select “No” to return to the
previous screen without restoring to the
factory default settings.
Light control switch
S03AH
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the light control switch
is turned to the off position. If the
vehicle is left unattended for a
long time with the light control
switch set to a position other
than the off position, the battery
may be discharged.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The light control switch operates when the
key is inserted in the ignition switch.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-48
(207,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Regardless of the position of the light
control switch, the illuminated lights are
turned off when the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
The light control switch can be oper-
ated (except auto on/off headlights),
even under the following conditions.
. when the push-button ignition
switch is turned off (models with “key-
less access with push-button start
system”)
. when the key is not inserted into the
ignition switch (models without “key-
less access with push-button start
system”)
If the driver’s door is opened while the
headlights are illuminated under such
conditions, a chirp sound will inform
the driver that the lights are illuminated.
& Headlights
S03AH01
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
“
” position:
The headlights are all off.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
“
” position:
Instrument panel illumination, parking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
“
” position: auto on/off headlights
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
The light sensitivity of the auto on/off
headlights can be changed by operating
the combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Auto Headlights” F3-48. Also, the
setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
! Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlights
S03AH0106
While the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-
matically turn on when the windshield
wipers operate several times. The head-
lights will automatically turn off when the
wipers stop.
The ON/OFF setting of this function can be
changed by operating the combination
meter display. For details, refer to “Auto
Headlights” F3-48. Also, the setting can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-49
3
(208,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Welcome lighting function
S03AH0103
The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth approach-
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights
When approaching:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
automatically illuminate when unlocking
the doors (for Outback, including the rear
gate) by using the remote keyless entry
system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds
*1
and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam head-
lights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
When exiting:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when either of the
following operation is done.
. The push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” status (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)
. The key is pulled out from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
The low beam headlights will turn off under
any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by the
welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the door
is opened and closed.
*1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking procedure
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which the
low beam headlights remain on by the welcome
lighting function can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails. Also, you can change the setting by
operating the combination meter display. For
details, refer to “Welcome Lighting” F3-48. For
models with the genuine SUBARU navigation
system, you can change the setting by using the
navigation system. For details, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights
S03AH0101
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-50
(209,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change
(dimmer)
S03AH02
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the center position.
& High beam assist function (if
equipped)
S03AH07
Type A
1) Camera for high beam assist function
Type B
1) Stereo camera for high beam assist
The high beam assist function automati-
cally changes the headlight between high
beam and low beam. When all of the
following conditions are met, the headlight
will change to high beam.
. When the vehicle speed increases to or
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
. There is no preceding vehicle.
. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.
. The road does not have a sharp curve.
When any of the following conditions is
met, the headlight will change to low beam.
. When the vehicle speed decreases to
or below 10 mph (16 km/h).
. When the forward area of the vehicle is
bright.
. When there is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle.
. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-
tioning or is temporarily stopped (Type B).
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
This setting can be changed to OFF
(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. Do not overestimate the capacity of
the high beam assist function. The
driver always has the responsibility to
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-51
3
(210,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
understand the surrounding situation,
to drive safely, and to change the
headlight mode manually if necessary.
Type A:
. Observe the following points in
order to operate the high beam assist
function properly.
– Do not touch the camera or the
lens.
– Do not apply any strong impact to
the camera or the inside mirror.
– Do not disassemble the camera
or inside mirror.
– Do not spill liquid on the inside
mirror and camera.
– Do not place any objects over the
dashboard.
– Do not carry excessive luggage.
– Do not modify the vehicle.
– When replacing the windshield
glass, use the genuine SUBARU
parts (or equivalent products).
Type B:
. The high beam assist function uti-
lizes the stereo camera installed at the
position of the front map lights.
. For details on how to handle the
stereo camera, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the EyeSight
system.
NOTE
Observe the following points in order to
operate the high beam assist function
properly.
Type A:
. Do not attach labels or stickers to
the windshield glass near the camera.
. Do not attach any accessories near
the inside mirror and camera.
If it is necessary to attach a label,
sticker or accessory in the position
shown above, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
Type B:
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
! How to use the high beam assist
function
S03AH0701
The high beam assist function will be
activated when all the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the low beam headlights are
on automatically.
. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.
High beam assist indicator (green)
When the high beam assist function is
activated, the high beam assist indicator
on the combination meter will illuminate.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-52
(211,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Malfunction of the high beam assist
function
S03AH0705
If the high beam assist function is mal-
functioning or is temporarily stopped, the
headlight will be fixed at low beam.
High beam assist warning indicator (yel-
low)
When the high beam assist function
malfunctions, the high beam assist warn-
ing indicator on the combination meter will
appear. In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by your SUBARU dealer.
! Temporary stop of high beam assist
function
S03AH0706
If the high beam assist function stops
temporarily due to poor visibility or abnor-
mal temperature, the message appears on
the combination meter. Once the condi-
tions have been remedied, drive the
vehicle for a while to restore the system.
NOTE
Even when the operation conditions of
the high beam assist function are met,
there may be a case in which the high
beam assist indicator does not illumi-
nate.
Type A:
In this case, turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and then to
the “ON” position again. Check if the
high beam assist indicator illuminates.
If the indicator does not illuminate,
have the vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer.
Type B:
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight system.
! How to temporarily lower the sensi-
tivity of the high beam assist func-
tion
S03AH0704
The sensitivity of the high beam assist
function can be lowered by using the
following operations.
Type A:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) Automatic dimming on/off button
2. Press and hold the automatic dimming
on/off button for 15 to 20 seconds.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the LED indi-
cator on the automatic dimming on/off
button will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered while
driving.
. You can resume the sensitivity of the
high beam assist function by using
either of the following operations.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and then
start the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-53
3
(212,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
– Press and hold the automatic
dimming on/off button for 15 to 20
seconds again.
Type B:
1. Before turning the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, set the light control switch to
the “AUTO” position and push the signal
lever forward (high beam position).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and within approximately 15 sec-
onds, press the “
/ ” (following distance
setting) switch more than 10 times con-
secutively.
When the sensitivity of the high beam
assist function is lowered, the high beam
assist indicator light “
” (yellow) on the
combination meter will flash.
NOTE
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function cannot be lowered in
the following conditions.
– Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise
Control is in operation
– The EyeSight warning indicator
(yellow) is illuminated
. The sensitivity of the high beam
assist function returns to normal level
the next time the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position
and the engine is restarted.
! How to change the headlight mode
manually
S03AH0702
Change to the low beam:
When you return the turn signal lever to the
center position, the high beam assist
function will turn off and the high beam
assist indicator will turn off.
Change to the high beam:
When you turn the light control switch to
the “
” position, the headlight mode will
be changed to the high beam.
At this time, the high beam assist function
will turn off, the high beam assist indicator
will turn off and the high beam indicator
light will turn on.
NOTE
. After manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
on the high beam assist function,
return the light control switch to the
“AUTO” position.
. When manually changing the head-
light mode to the high beam, if you turn
the light control switch to the “
”
position, the parking lights, front side
marker lights, rear side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights will
turn on.
! Tips for the high beam assist sys-
tem
S03AH0703
. The high beam assist function recog-
nizes the condition surrounding the vehicle
based on the brightness of illumination
ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore, the
headlight mode may switch in some
situations that do not match to the driver’s
sense.
. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not be
detected.
. Under the following situations, the
brightness of ambient illumination may
not be detected correctly and the high
beam assist function may not work prop-
erly. As a result, the glare of the high beam
may disturb the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead. Also, the low beam mode
may continue although there are no
oncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.
In the such cases, change the headlight
mode manually.
– In bad weather (fog, snow, sand
storm, heavy rain, etc.).
– When the windshield glass is dirty or
fogged.
– When the windshield is cracked or
damaged.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-54
(213,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
– If there are lights similar to the
headlights or the tail lights in the
surrounding area.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead is driven without its head-
lights and tail lights on.
– If the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead are dirty or discolored, or if the
light beams are not aimed correctly.
– When a rapid change of brightness
continues while driving.
– When driving on a road with many
ups and downs or uneven surfaces.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When there are some objects that
reflect light strongly, such as a road
sign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.
– When the rear part of the vehicle
ahead, such as a container, reflects
light strongly.
– When the headlights of your vehicle
are damaged or dirty.
– When your vehicle is tilted, such as
in case the vehicle has a flat tire or is
being towed.
– When the inside mirror or the
camera is deformed or dirty (Type A).
– When the stereo camera is de-
formed or the stereo camera lenses
are dirty (Type B).
– Immediately after the engine has
started (Type B).
. In the following conditions, the head-
light mode will not be automatically chan-
ged from the high beam to the low beam.
– When your vehicle passes an on-
coming vehicle suddenly in a blind
curve.
– When another vehicle passes in
front of your vehicle.
– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-
hicle ahead comes in and out of view
because of continuous curves, median
strips, roadside trees, etc.
. If the camera (Type A)/stereo camera
(Type B) detects the light of the front fog
lights of an oncoming vehicle, the head-
light mode may change from the high
beam to the low beam automatically.
. The headlight mode may change from
the high beam to the low beam, or the low
beam mode may continue, when affected
by a street light, traffic signal, illumination
of an advertisement board, or a reflective
object such as a road sign and signboard.
. The timing of the change of headlight
mode may differ due to the following
factors.
Type A:
– the vehicle condition (e.g., number
of passengers or weight of loaded
cargo).
– surrounding situation (e.g., move-
ment and direction of an oncoming
vehicle or vehicle ahead).
– detection limitations of the camera
angle.
Type B:
– Color or brightness of the headlights
of an oncoming vehicle or the tail lights
of a vehicle ahead.
– The headlights of the oncoming
vehicle or the tail lights of the vehicle
ahead are covered with mud, snow,
etc.
– Movement and direction of an on-
coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.
– When the headlights of an oncom-
ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicle
ahead illuminate on only one side.
– When the oncoming vehicle or
vehicle ahead is a motorcycle.
– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,
road surface, etc.).
– Number of passengers and weight
of loaded cargo.
– Limitation of the detection ability of
the stereo camera.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-55
3
(214,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Headlight flasher
S03AH03
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works even
though the lighting switch is in the off
position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the
high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
& Daytime running light system
S03AH04
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “
” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-
cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the off or “
”
position.
. The light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights do not turn on
automatically.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
NOTE
. When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the front side marker lights,
tail lights and license plate lights are
illuminated.
. While the turn signal is flashing, the
high beam headlight on the side which
the turn signal is flashing turns off.
. While the hazard warning flasher is
on, the high beam headlights turn off.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
3-56
(215,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Steering Responsive Head-
light (SRH) (if equipped)
S03BL
1) The target area of illumination when SRH
is activated
2) The target area of illumination when SRH
is not activated
SRH is a function that automatically moves
the headlight beam to the left or right in
accordance with the steering angle. This
function helps to improve the visibility at
night by illuminating the road ahead at
corners and intersections.
You can turn the SRH function on or off.
The settings can be changed by using the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “SRH” F3-46.
1) Warning screen
2) SRH OFF indicator
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter turns off when SRH is turned on.
The SRH OFF indicator on the combina-
tion meter illuminates when SRH is turned
off.
If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFF
indicator on the combination meter blinks
and a message appears on the warning
screen when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. It indicates that SRH has
been deactivated. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
. If you turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position with SRH turned off and
then start the engine again, SRH will
automatically turn on.
. When you turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-
cator will illuminate and turn off after
several seconds.
. SRH only activates when the vehicle
is traveling forward at the speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.
Instruments and controls/Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)
3-57
3
(216,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Headlight beam leveler
(models with LED headlights)
S03AT
The LED headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare when your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
due to the vehicle carrying heavy load.
The automatic headlight beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
Turn signal lever
S03AI
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left turn
signal, push the turn signal lever down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically. If the lever does not
return after cornering, return the lever to
the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
& One-touch lane changer
S03AI01
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
immediately release it.
The operational/non-operational setting of
the one-touch lane changer’s can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler (models with LED headlights)
3-58
(217,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Illumination brightness con-
trol
S03AJ
The illumination brightness of the instru-
ment panel dims under the following
conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “
” or
“
” position
. when the light switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the headlights illuminate
automatically
You can adjust the illumination brightness
for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
& Auto dimmer cancel function
S03AJ01
When the ambient light is bright, the
illumination brightness is set to the max-
imum regardless of the position of the
control dial. In this case, you cannot adjust
the illumination brightness by using the
control dial. When the ambient light is dark,
you can dim the illumination brightness as
described above.
The operational/non-operational setting
and sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancel
function can be changed by your SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
Front fog light switch
(if equipped)
S03AL
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
To turn on the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch to the “
” position
while the headlights are in either of the
following conditions.
. while the headlight switch is in the “
”
position with the low beam mode selected
. while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights turn on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights:
Turn the fog light switch back down to the
“
” position.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
3-59
3
(218,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Indicator light
The indicator light located on the combina-
tion meter will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
Wiper and washer
S03AM
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the blade rubbers and
might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear win-
dow, always use the windshield
washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the blade rubbers are not frozen
to the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blade rubbers frozen to
the window glass could cause
not only the blade rubbers to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the blade
rubbers are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, windshield wiper dei-
cer (if equipped) or rear window
defogger before turning on the
wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe location, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
sition and clean the window glass
to allow proper wiper operation.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
3-60
(219,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Refer to “Windshield washer
fluid” F11-31.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is pro-
tected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continu-
ously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe location, turn off
the wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your blade rubbers and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the blade
rubbers results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the blade rubbers using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and blade
rubbers with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades (or blade
rubbers) with new ones. For replace-
ment instructions, refer to “Replace-
ment of wiper blades” F11-32.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
S03AM01
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
! Windshield wipers
S03AM0101
: Mist (for a single wipe)
: Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
:
High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “
” position.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
3-61
3
(220,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
S03AM0103
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
S03AM0104
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light appears when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light appears,
refill the tank with fluid. For the tank
refilling method, refer to “Windshield
washer fluid” F11-31.
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
3-62
(221,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch (Outback)
S03AM02
:
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
: Off
:
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration)
! Rear wiper
S03AM0201
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob switch
to the “
” position.
With the switch turned to the “
” position,
the rear wiper will operate intermittently at
intervals corresponding to the vehicle
speed. In this position, when you move
the select lever to the “R” position, the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever from the
“R” (reverse) position to another position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off
“
” position, if the front windshield wiper is
operating continuously, the rear wiper will
operate intermittently when you move the
select lever to the “R” (reverse) position.
The factory setting (default setting) of the
reverse gear interlocked rear wiper is as
follows.
. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational
. Other models: Operational
This setting can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer for
details.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
gate. Doing so may damage the rear
wiper when it operates.
! Washer
S03AM0202
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
NOTE
When the amount of washer fluid is
getting low, the rear washer fluid will
first be stopped. This means that the
amount of washer fluid is low, and it
should be added immediately.
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
3-63
3
(222,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Defogger and deicer
S03BI
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated only when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
Control switch (type A)
1) Rear window defogger button
Control switch (type B)
1) Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button
To activate the defogger and deicer sys-
tem, press the control switch. The rear
window defogger, outside mirror defogger
and windshield wiper deicer are activated
simultaneously. The indicator light on the
control switch illuminates while the defog-
ger and deicer system is activated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and outside
mirrors have been cleared and the wind-
shield wiper blade rubbers have been
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
3-64
(223,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
deiced completely before that time, press
the control switch to turn them off. If
defrosting, defogging or deicing is not
complete, you have to press the control
switch to turn them on again.
It is possible to set the defogger and deicer
system for the continuous operation mode
by operating the combination meter dis-
play. For details, refer to “Defogger” F3-
47.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the rear window. They may da-
mage the conductors printed on
the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is in the continuous operation
mode:
– If the vehicle speed remains at 9
mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15
minutes, the windshield wiper dei-
cer system automatically stops op-
erating. However, the rear window
defogger system and outside mirror
defogger system maintain continu-
ous operation in this condition.
– If the vehicle battery voltage
drops below the permissible level,
continuous operation of the defog-
ger system and deicer system is
canceled and the system stops
operating.
Mirrors
S03AP
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror (without auto-
dimming function) (if
equipped)
S03AP08
1) Normal position
2) Anti-glare position
Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.
To reduce glare from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-
glare position.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-65
3
(224,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(U.S.-
spec. models without
EyeSight system - if
equipped)
S03AP09
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink
®
button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on/off button
7) Compass display button
8) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass and
HomeLink
®
wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing
and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
S03AP0901
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve your
vision. For this reason, use care not to
cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-66
(225,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Compass zone adjustment
S03AP0902
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass display
button for 3 seconds until the zone selec-
tion comes up (a number will be displayed
in the mirror compass window).
3. Press the compass display button
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
S03AP0903
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
seconds until a “C” appears in the com-
pass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
S03AP0904
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink
®
website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-67
3
(226,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor from
the outlet during programming to
prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener program-
ming in the U.S.A.
S03AP090401
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-68
(227,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 10 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door open-
er’s hand-held transmitter between 1 and
3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace this
programming step 4 with procedures in
“Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada” F3-
70.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button
and check the HomeLink
®
indicator light. If
the indicator light stays on continuously,
your garage door should activate and the
programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be protected
by a rolling code feature. In this case you
need to perform the additional steps that
are described in “Programming rolling-
code-protected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.” F3-69.
! Programming rolling-code-pro-
tected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.
S03AP090402
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-68. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person may
make the programming quicker and
easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit. The
exact location and color of the button may
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-69
3
(228,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
vary by brand of garage door opener. If it is
difficult to locate the training button, refer
to your garage door opener’s instruction
manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit (which
activates the “training light” on the unit).
Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may require
you to do the above press-hold-release
sequence a third time to complete the
programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates
and garage door openers in
Canada
S03AP090403
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 10
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-70
(229,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System
S03AP090404
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
S03AP090405
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
S03AP090406
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLink
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button mem-
ory
S03AP090407
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
S03AP090408
If you cannot activate a device using
the corresponding HomeLink
®
button
after programming, contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-71
3
(230,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Auto-dimming mirror with
HomeLink
®
(except U.S.-
spec. models - if equipped)
S03AP07
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink
®
button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on button
7) Automatic dimming off button
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a HomeLink
®
wireless
control system.
By pressing the automatic dimming on/off
button, the automatic dimming function is
turned on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the select lever is shifted into the
“R” (reverse) position. This is to ensure
good rearward visibility during reversing.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing
and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
S03AP0701
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve your
vision. For this reason, use care not to
cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
S03AP0704
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink
®
website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-72
(231,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
. Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-73
3
(232,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor from
the outlet during programming to
prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener program-
ming in the U.S.A.
S03AP070401
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door open-
er’s hand-held transmitter between 1 and
3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace this
programming step 4 with procedures in
“Programming for entrance gates and
garage door openers in Canada” F3-
75.
5. Hold down both buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed button
and check the HomeLink
®
indicator light. If
the indicator light stays on continuously,
your garage door should activate and the
programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be protected
by a rolling code feature. In this case you
need to perform the additional steps that
are described in “Programming rolling-
code-protected garage door openers in
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-74
(233,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
the U.S.A.” F3-75.
! Programming rolling-code-pro-
tected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.
S03AP070402
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-74. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person may
make the programming quicker and
easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit. The
exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener. If it is
difficult to locate the training button, refer
to your garage door opener’s instruction
manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the training button on the garage
door opener motor head unit (which
activates the “training light” on the unit).
Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may require
you to do the above press-hold-release
sequence a third time to complete the
programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the HomeLink
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates
and garage door openers in
Canada
S03AP070403
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-75
3
(234,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System
S03AP070404
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
S03AP070405
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
S03AP070406
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLink
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button mem-
ory
S03AP070407
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the sale
of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-76
(235,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
S03AP070408
If you cannot activate a device using
the corresponding HomeLink
®
button
after programming, contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(models
with EyeSight system)
S03AP10
1) Display
2) HomeLink
®
buttons
3) Switch
During nighttime driving, the auto-dimming
feature senses distracting glare from
vehicle headlights behind you and auto-
matically dims to eliminate the glare and
help preserve your vision.
! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-
ture
S03AP1001
Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-
dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimming
feature is enabled when the switch’s green
LED indicator is on. The auto-dimming
feature will default to on with each ignition
cycle.
! To Operate the Compass Feature
S03AP1002
1. To turn the compass feature on/off,
press and hold the “
” switch for more
than 3 seconds or until the display turns
on/off. The compass feature will default to
on with each ignition cycle.
2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
Compass calibration zones
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-77
3
(236,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
3. To adjust for compass zone variance:
(1) Find your current location and
zone number on the map.
(2) Press and hold the “
” switch for
more than 6 seconds or until a zone
number appears in the display.
(3) Once the zone number appears in
the display, toggle the “
” switch
again until your current location zone
number appears. After you stop press-
ing the switch, your new zone number
will be saved. Within a few seconds,
the display will show a compass direc-
tion.
4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-
ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,
recalibrate the compass. Press and hold
the “
” switch for more than 9 seconds or
until a “C” appears in the display. Once a
“C” appears in the display, slowly drive the
vehicle in circles until compass is cali-
brated.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
S03AP1003
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radiofrequency remotes
used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even home
lighting. The below steps are generic
programming instructions; for Genie and
Sommer garage door openers please go
directly to the HomeLink
®
website. Addi-
tional information and programming vi-
deos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
CAUTION
. Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
. Do not use HomeLink
®
with any
garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features
as required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any gar-
age door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect
an object signaling the door to
stop and reverse does not meet
current U.S. federal safety stan-
dards.
. It is also recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-
held remote (garage door opener
remote) of the device for quicker
and more accurate training.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” or “ACC” position before
programming and/or operating
HomeLink
®
.
. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-
age door opener remote) of the
device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as
for future HomeLink
®
program-
ming. It is also suggested that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons
be erased for security purposes.
Refer to “Erasing HomeLink
®
but-
tons” F3-81.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-78
(237,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Programming a New HomeLink
®
button
S03AP100301
1) Indicator Light
2) HomeLink
®
buttons
1. Press and release the HomeLink
®
button that you would like to program.
The HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash
orange slowly (if not, refer to “Erasing
HomeLink
®
buttons” F3-81).
1) Garage door opener remote
2. Position the hand-held remote (garage
door opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink
®
button that
you would like to program.
NOTE
Some hand-held remotes (garage door
opener remotes) may actually train
better at a distance of 6 to 12 inches
(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you
have difficulty with the programming
process.
3. While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and hold the hand-
held remote button. Continue pressing the
hand-held remote button until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from
orange to green. You may now release the
hand-held remote button.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to re-
place this “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with proce-
dures noted in the “Gate Operator /
Canadian Programming” section. Refer
to “Gate Operator / Canadian Program-
ming” F3-81.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-79
3
(238,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Indicator Light
4. Press the HomeLink
®
button that you
would like to program and observe the
indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant
green, your device should operate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed. At this point, if your device
operates, programming is complete.
. If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for two sec-
onds and release the HomeLink
®
but-
ton up to three times to complete the
programming process. At this point if
your device operates, programming is
complete. If the device does not
operate, continue with the next step
of the programming instructions.
1) “Learn” button
5. At the garage door opener motor,
(security gate motor, etc...) locate the
“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit (see the device’s manual to identify
this button). The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE
A ladder and/or second person may
simplify the following steps.
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,
“Smart”, or “Program” button. You now
have 30 seconds in which to complete step
7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the
HomeLink
®
button up to three times. At
this point programming is complete and
your device should operate when the
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and re-
leased.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-80
(239,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Status Indicators
8. If status indicator arrows appear next
to the indicator light, please refer to
“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”
F3-82.
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. For
Genie and Sommer garage door openers
please go directly to the HomeLink
®
website.
! Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
gramming
S03AP100302
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter remote signals to “time-out”
(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-
sion, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink
®
to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are de-
signed to “time-out” in the same manner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held
remote will go off when the device times
out, indicating that it has finished transmit-
ting.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the program-
ming procedures, replace “Programming a
New HomeLink
®
button” step 3 with the
following:
While the HomeLink
®
indicator light is
flashing orange, press and release (“cy-
cle”) your device’s hand-held remote every
two seconds until the HomeLink
®
indicator
light changes from orange to green. You
may now release the hand-held remote
button.
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug
the device during the “cycling” process
to prevent possible overheating.
Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” step 4 to complete.
! Using HomeLink
®
S03AP100303
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink
®
button. Activa-
tion will now occur for the trained device
(i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/
office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held remote of the device may also
be used at any time.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
S03AP100304
To erase programming from the three
buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased but can be “reprogrammed” as
outlined below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
®
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The LED
indicator will change from continuously lit
to rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
HomeLink
®
is now ready to be pro-
grammed at any time beginning with
“Programming a New HomeLink
®
button”
- step 1.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-81
3
(240,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink
®
button
S03AP100305
To program a previously trained button,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The
HomeLink
®
button can be released at this
point. Proceed with “Programming a New
HomeLink
®
button” - step 3.
3. If you do not complete the program-
ming of a new device to the button, it will
revert to the previously stored program-
ming.
! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-
nication
S03AP100306
HomeLink
®
has the capability of commu-
nicating with your garage door opener.
HomeLink
®
can receive and display “clos-
ing” or “opening” status messages from
compatible garage door opener systems.
At any time, HomeLink
®
can also recall and
display the last recorded status commu-
nicated by the garage door opener to
indicate your garage door being “closed”
or “opened”.
HomeLink
®
has the capability of receiving
this communication from the garage door
opener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).
Range may be reduced by obstacles such
as houses or trees. You may have to slow
your vehicle speed to successfully receive
the garage door opener communication.
! Programming Two-Way Commu-
nication
S03AP100307
1) Status Indicators
Within 5 seconds after programming a new
HomeLink
®
button, both of HomeLink’s
garage door status indicators will flash
rapidly green indicating that the garage
door two-way communication has been
enabled. If your garage door status in-
dicators flashed, two-way communication
programming is complete.
If the garage door status indicators do not
flash, additional HomeLink
®
information
and programming videos can be found
online at www.HomeLink.com and
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.
! Using Two-Way Communication
S03AP100308
1) Status Indicator
Recall and display (at any time) the last
recorded garage door status message
communicated to HomeLink
®
by simulta-
neously pressing HomeLink
®
buttons 1
and 2 for 2 seconds. HomeLink
®
will
display the last recorded status for 3
seconds.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-82
(241,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
If two-way communication programming is
successful, HomeLink
®
will display the
status of your garage door opener with
arrow indicators (see below).
1) Garage Door Opener CLOSING (Blinking
Orange)
2) Garage Door Opener CLOSED (Solid
Green)
3) Garage Door Opener OPENING (Blink-
ing Orange)
4) Garage Door Opener OPENED (Solid
Green)
! Certification
S03AP100309
In the event that there are still program-
ming difficulties or questions, additional
HomeLink
®
information and programming
videos can be found at
www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or
by calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotline
at 1-800-355-3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-83
3
(242,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Canada-spec. models
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the garage door or other device
to prevent potential harm or da-
mage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
3-84
(243,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Outside mirrors
S03AP03
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
S03AP0301
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the
convex mirror to judge the distance
of vehicles behind you when chan-
ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (or
glance backwards) to determine the
actual size and distance of objects
that you view in convex mirror.
CAUTION
Make sure to adjust the mirrors
before driving.
! Remote control mirror switch
S03AP0302
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
S03BF
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to the
fixed position, adjust the steering
wheel again. It is dangerous to
drive without locking the steering
wheel. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in per-
sonal injury.
– CONTINUED –
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
3-85
3
(244,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to “Front
seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
Horn
S03AR
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Heated Steering Wheel sys-
tem (if equipped)
S03BM
The Heated Steering Wheel system
warms the steering wheel at a constant
temperature.
1) Heated Steering Wheel switch
2) Indicator light
3) Heated area
To turn on the Heated Steering Wheel
system, pull the Heated Steering Wheel
switch when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. Then the steering wheel will
be warmed and the indicator light on the
switch will illuminate. To turn off the Heated
Steering Wheel system, pull the switch
again. Then the indicator light will turn off.
Instruments and controls/Horn
3-86
(245,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
. Use the Heated Steering Wheel
system with the engine running.
Otherwise, the battery voltage
may drop below the permissible
level and it may not be possible to
start the engine.
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the
Heated Steering Wheel for a long
period of time. When using the
Heated Steering Wheel, always
be sure to warn the persons
concerned.
. Do not cover the Heated Steering
Wheel with an object such as a
steering wheel cover. Doing so
may cause the Heated Steering
Wheel to overheat.
NOTE
. If the surface temperature of the
steering wheel is approximately above
1048F (408C) when the Heated Steering
Wheel system is turned on, the system
will not heat the steering wheel. Then,
the indicator light will continue to
illuminate.
. The Heated Steering Wheel system
will automatically turn off approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the system
has been turned on.
Instruments and controls/Heated Steering Wheel system
3-87
3
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(247,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S04
Ventilator control .................................................... 4-2
Center ventilators .................................................. 4-2
Side ventilators...................................................... 4-2
Rear ventilators (if equipped) ................................. 4-2
Climate control panel ............................................. 4-3
Type A ................................................................... 4-3
Type B ................................................................... 4-4
Automatic climate control system (type B) .......... 4-5
Sensors ................................................................. 4-5
Manual climate control ........................................... 4-6
Airflow mode selection........................................... 4-6
Temperature control............................................... 4-7
Fan speed control .................................................. 4-8
Air conditioner control ........................................... 4-8
Air inlet selection................................................... 4-8
Defrosting................................................................ 4-9
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner ...... 4-9
Cleaning ventilator grille .........................................4-9
Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight ......4-9
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit..................................................................4-9
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ................................................................4-9
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather condition .................... 4-10
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded................................................ 4-10
Refrigerant for your climate control system .......... 4-10
Air filtration system.............................................. 4-10
Replacing the cabin air filter ................................. 4-11
Climate control
4
(248,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Ventilator control
S04AF
& Center ventilators
S04AF01
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the center grille
open/close wheel upward to the “
”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“
” position.
& Side ventilators
S04AF02
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
open/close wheel upward to the “
”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“
” position.
& Rear ventilators (if equipped)
S04AF04
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the rear grille
open/close wheel upward to the “
”
position.
To close it, turn the wheel downward to the
“
” position.
Climate control/Ventilator control
4-2
(249,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Climate control panel
S04AG
& Type A
S04AG01
1) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F4-8.)
2) “A/C” button (Refer to “Air conditioner
control” F4-8.)
3) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
5) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-7 and “MAX A/C
mode” F4-7.)
6) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6 and “Defrosting” F4-9.)
7) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-64.)
– CONTINUED –
Climate control/Climate control panel
4-3
4
(250,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Type B
S04AG02
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-7.)
2) “AUTO” button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control system (type B)” F4-5.)
3) “ON/OFF” button (Refer to “Automatic
climate control system (type B)” F4-5.)
4) Fan speed control button (for decreasing
the fan speed) (Refer to “Fan speed
control” F4-8.)
5) Fan speed control button (for increasing
the fan speed) (Refer to “Fan speed
control” F4-8.)
6) “A/C” button (Refer to “Air conditioner
control” F4-8.)
7) “MAX A/C” button (Refer to “MAX A/C
mode” F4-7.)
8) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-7.)
9) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-8.)
10) “SYNC” button (Refer to “SYNC mode
(type B)” F4-8.)
11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-6.)
12) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-6 and “Defrosting” F4-9.)
13) Rear window and outside mirror defogger
button (Refer to “Defogger and deicer”
F3-64.)
Climate control/Climate control panel
4-4
(251,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Automatic climate control
system (type B)
S04AC
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. The blower fan rotates at a low speed
when the engine coolant temperature is
low.
. For efficient defogging or dehumidi-
fying in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button.
When the automatic climate control mode
is selected, the following items are auto-
matically controlled.
. Outlet air temperature
. Fan speed
. Airflow distribution
. Air inlet control
. Air conditioner compressor operation
To activate this mode, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dials.
2. Press the “AUTO” button. The FULL
AUTO mode is selected and the “FULL
AUTO” indicator light on the display
illuminates.
NOTE
. If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the “ON/
OFF” button, rear window and outside
mirror defogger button or temperature
control dials during FULL AUTO mode
operation, the “FULL” indicator light on
the control panel will turn off and the
“AUTO” indicator light will remain
illuminated. You can then manually
control the system as desired. To
change the system back to the FULL
AUTO mode, press the “AUTO” button.
. During FULL AUTO mode operation,
a small amount of air may flow from the
foot outlets when ventilation mode is
displayed.
To turn off the climate control system,
press the “ON/OFF” button. The air inlet
selection is then automatically switched to
the outside air mode.
& Sensors
S04AC02
1) Solar sensor
2) Interior air temperature sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
– CONTINUED –
Climate control/Automatic climate control system (type B)
4-5
4
(252,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions:
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows:
– Solar sensor: beside the speaker grille
on the dashboard
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center
panel
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
front grille.
Manual climate control
S04AB
& Airflow mode selection
S04AB04
Select the preferred airflow mode by
pressing the airflow mode selection button
or defroster button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
A) Models with rear ventilators
Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and the
foot outlets
A) Models with rear ventilators
Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of the
Climate control/Manual climate control
4-6
(253,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
instrument panel and some through wind-
shield defroster outlets (A small amount of
air flows to the windshield and both side
windows to prevent fogging.)
A) Models with rear ventilators
Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel
A) Models with rear ventilators
Defrost: Windshield defroster outlets and
both side outlets of the instrument panel
NOTE
. When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. At the
same time, the air inlet selection is
automatically set to the outside air
mode.
In this state:
– The air conditioner indicator light
does not illuminate.
– You cannot stop the air condi-
tioner compressor by pressing the
air conditioner button.
& Temperature control
S04AB05
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! MAX A/C mode
S04AB0503
Perform the following operation to select
the MAX A/C mode.
. Turn the temperature control dial to the
“MAX A/C” position (models with type A
climate control system).
. Press the “MAX A/C” button (models
with type B climate control system).
When this mode is selected, some of the
settings will be changed as follows.
Type A climate control system:
. The air inlet selection mode will be
changed to the ON position (recirculation).
. The air conditioner will turn on.
Type B climate control system:
. The temperature setting will be chan-
ged to the maximum cooling mode.
. The fan speed setting will be changed
to the maximum speed.
. The airflow mode setting will be chan-
ged to the “
” (ventilation) mode.
. The air inlet selection mode will be
changed to the ON position (recirculation).
– CONTINUED –
Climate control/Manual climate control
4-7
4
(254,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. The air conditioner will turn on.
While the MAX A/C mode is selected,
performing the following operation returns
the system to the setting that had been
selected before the MAX A/C mode is
selected.
. Turn the temperature control dial to a
position other than “MAX A/C” position
(models with type A climate control sys-
tem).
. Press the “MAX A/C” button again
(models with type B climate control sys-
tem).
! SYNC mode (type B)
S04AB0505
When the SYNC mode is turned on, both
the driver’s and passenger’s side tem-
peratures are synchronized using the
driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to turn on the
SYNC mode. The SYNC button indicator
will illuminate.
Press the SYNC button again or turn the
passenger’s side temperature control dial
to cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNC
button indicator will not illuminate. In this
case, temperature control on the driver’s
side and passenger’s side is separated.
The temperature will be controlled indivi-
dually using the driver’s and passenger’s
temperature control dials.
& Fan speed control
S04AB06
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
speed control dial (type A), or by pressing
the fan speed control buttons (type B).
& Air conditioner control
S04AB07
The air conditioner operates only when the
engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again. The indicator light will turn
off.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approxi-
mately 328F (08C), the air conditioner
and dehumidification system may not
work properly.
& Air inlet selection
S04AB08
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road. When the
ON position is selected, the “
” indicator
light on the information display (type A)/the
indicator light on the air inlet selection
button (type B) illuminates.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
turn off.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
Climate control/Manual climate control
4-8
(255,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Defrosting
S04AH
Select the desired “ ” mode or “ ” mode
to defrost or dehumidify the windshield and
front door windows by performing the
following procedures.
. To select the “
” mode, press the
defroster button.
. To select the “
” mode, press the
airflow mode selection button and select
the “
” mode.
NOTE
. When the “ ” mode or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor automatically operates to more
quickly defog the windshield. (The air
conditioner indicator light does not
illuminate in this case.) At the same
time, the air inlet selection is automa-
tically set to the outside air mode. For
details, refer to “Airflow mode selec-
tion” F4-6.
. If the defroster button is pressed
while the “
” mode is selected, it will
return to the previous mode before
selecting the “
” mode.
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
S04AD
& Cleaning ventilator grille
S04AD01
1) Front ventilator inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
S04AD02
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of the
air conditioner for maximum cooling effi-
ciency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
S04AD03
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
S04AD04
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
– CONTINUED –
Climate control/Defrosting
4-9
4
(256,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather condition
S04AD05
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
S04AD06
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
S04AD07
1) Air conditioner label
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf).
Therefore, the method for adding, chan-
ging or checking the refrigerant is different
from the method for Freon R-12 (CFC12)
and R-134a (HFC134a).
Before adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant, check the air conditioner label
in the location shown in the illustration to
confirm which type of refrigerant is used in
your vehicle.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for service.
Repairs needed as a result of using the
wrong refrigerant are not covered under
warranty.
Air filtration system
S04AE
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the cabin air filter according to
the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.” This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
Climate control/Air filtration system
4-10
(257,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Replacing the cabin air filter
S04AE01
1. Remove the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
(3) Push both sides of the glove box
inward to unlock the stoppers and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage
the hinge.
2. Remove the cover of the cabin air filter.
– CONTINUED –
Climate control/Air filtration system
4-11
4
(258,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
3. Remove the cabin air filter according to
the following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Pull the air filter approximately 3.9
inches (10 cm) first.
(2) Gently push the near side of the air
filter down.
(3) Pull out the air filter.
4. Replace the filter with a new one.
5. Reinstall the cover.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
6. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
7. Close the glove box.
Climate control/Air filtration system
4-12
(261,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S05
Antenna ................................................................... 5-2
Printed antenna ..................................................... 5-2
Roof antenna (if equipped) ..................................... 5-2
Audio set ................................................................. 5-2
Audio
5
(262,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Antenna
S05AA
& Printed antenna
S05AA01
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
The antenna is printed on the inner surface
of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
any other material over the antenna
portion of the rear window glass.
& Roof antenna (if equipped)
S05AA03
The satellite radio antenna and telematics
antenna (if equipped) are installed in the
center of the roof at the rear.
Audio set
S05AC
If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine
SUBARU navigation system or audio
system, refer to the separate navigation/
audio Owner’s Manual for details.
Audio/Antenna
5-2
(265,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S06
Interior light............................................................. 6-2
Dome light ............................................................. 6-2
Map light ............................................................... 6-2
Cargo area light (Outback) ..................................... 6-3
OFF delay timer ..................................................... 6-3
Sun visors ............................................................... 6-4
Vanity mirror with light........................................... 6-5
Storage compartment ............................................. 6-5
Glove box .............................................................. 6-6
Center console ...................................................... 6-6
Overhead console.................................................. 6-7
Pocket ................................................................... 6-7
Cup holder............................................................... 6-7
Front passenger’s cup holder................................. 6-7
Rear passenger’s cup holder.................................. 6-8
Bottle holders.......................................................... 6-8
Accessory power outlets........................................ 6-9
USB power supply (if equipped).......................... 6-11
Ashtray (if equipped)............................................ 6-12
Coat hook.............................................................. 6-13
Shopping bag hook .............................................. 6-14
Legacy ................................................................. 6-14
Outback................................................................ 6-14
Convenient grip (Outback)................................... 6-14
Floor mat ............................................................... 6-15
Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped) ......... 6-16
Using the cover .................................................... 6-16
To install the front cover....................................... 6-17
To remove the front cover..................................... 6-17
To remove the cover housing................................ 6-17
Stowage of the cargo area cover........................... 6-18
To take out the stowed cover housing................... 6-19
To install the cover housing.................................. 6-19
Convenient tie-down hooks (Outback) ............... 6-20
Under-floor storage compartment....................... 6-20
Interior equipment
6
(266,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Interior light
S06AA
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the lights are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
& Dome light
S06AA01
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions:
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically when any of the doors (for
Outback, including the rear gate) is
opened. Several seconds after all of the
doors (including the rear gate) are closed,
the dome light gradually turns off. For
details, refer to “OFF delay timer” F6-3.
& Map light
S06AA06
To turn on the map light, press the lens.
To turn it off, press the lens again.
! Door interlock switch
S06AA0602
Models with SUBARU STARLINK*
1) Door interlock switch
*: For details about the SUBARU STARLINK
(U.S.-spec. models only, if equipped), refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
SUBARU STARLINK Safety and Security.
Interior equipment/Interior light
6-2
(267,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Models without SUBARU STARLINK
1) Door interlock switch
The door interlock switch has the following
positions.
OFF: The map lights do not illuminate
automatically in conjunction with a door
opening. But, the lights can be turned on
manually by pressing the map light
switches.
DOOR: The map lights illuminate auto-
matically when any of the doors (other than
the rear gate or trunk lid) is opened even
while the map light switches are in the OFF
position. Several seconds after all of the
doors (other than the rear gate or trunk lid)
are closed, the map lights gradually turn
off. For details, refer to “OFF delay timer”
F6-3.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
S06AA02
1) DOOR
2) OFF
3) ON
The cargo area light switch has the
following positions.
DOOR: The light illuminates only when the
rear gate is opened. The light gradually
turns off several seconds after the rear
gate is closed. For derails, refer to “OFF
delay timer” F6-3.
OFF: The light remains off.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
& OFF delay timer
S06AA07
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. dome light
. map light
. Trunk light (Legacy)
. cargo area light (Outback)
After being illuminated automatically,
these lights remain on for a certain period
of time and then gradually turn off under
the following conditions.
. after the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position
. after any doors or the rear gate
(Outback) is closed (dome light)
. after all doors are closed (map light)
. after the rear gate is closed (cargo area
light)
. after the doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped)
(dome light and map light)
. after the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system (dome light
and map light)
. when approaching with the access key
fob (if equipped) (dome light and map light)
While the lights are illuminated, if any of
the following operations is performed, the
lights turn off immediately.
– CONTINUED –
Interior equipment/Interior light
6-3
6
(268,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 5
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the keyless access
function (if equipped).
. All doors and the rear gate (Outback)
are locked using the remote keyless entry
system.
The setting for the period of time in which
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details. Also, the
setting can be changed by operating the
combination meter display. For details,
refer to “Interior Light” 3-47.
Sun visors
S06AC
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you can slide the sun visor toward
the rear to prevent glare through the gap
between the sun visor and center pillar. To
slide the sun visor, pull it toward the rear of
the vehicle. When you have finished
sliding it, push it toward the front of the
vehicle.
Interior equipment/Sun visors
6-4
(269,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
Do not slide the sun visor over the
windshield. The slided sun visor
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity mirror with light
S06AC02
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being blinded by glare.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The lights beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nate when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
Storage compartment
S06AD
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops or an
accident.
. Do not store the following items
in the storage compartment.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire or
accident.
– Spray cans, containers with
flammable or corrosive li-
quids or any other dangerous
items.
– Plastic or other heat-vulner-
able or flammable articles
such as a lighter.
– CONTINUED –
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
6-5
6
(270,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Glove box
S06AD01
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, use the emer-
gency key to lock or unlock the glove box.
NOTE
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
& Center console
S06AD02
The center console box provides a storage
space.
1) Coin tray
2) Accessory tray
The lid located inside the center console
can be used as a coin tray or an accessory
tray for small items.
1) Pen holder
2) Card holder
When the lid inside the center console is
removed, you can use the center console
as a pen holder or a card holder.
The top of the console can be used as an
armrest.
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
6-6
(271,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Overhead console
S06AD04
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
Before operating this vehicle, en-
sure that the overhead console is
closed.
& Pocket
S06AD08
CAUTION
. Do not push the upper part of the
lid. Doing so could cause your
fingers to be pinched.
. Do not use the pocket as an
ashtray or leave a lighted cigar-
ette in the pocket. This could
cause a fire.
To use the pocket, push the lower part of
the lid lightly. It will automatically open.
Cup holder
S06AE
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might burn you
and/or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage up-
holstery, carpets or audio equip-
ment.
& Front passenger’s cup holder
S06AE01
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an acci-
dent.
. Take care not to spill a beverage
on the select lever or any
switch(es) in the adjacent area. If
the beverage is spilled, it may
cause a malfunction of the select
lever and/or switch(es).
– CONTINUED –
Interior equipment/Cup holder
6-7
6
(272,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
& Rear passenger’s cup holder
S06AE02
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage is
in the cup holder, do not fold down
or recline any seat. Otherwise, the
beverage could spill while driving
and, if the beverage is hot, it could
burn you and/or your passengers.
Bottle holders
S06AV
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
Interior equipment/Bottle holders
6-8
(273,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The bottle holder equipped on each door
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
S06AF
Power outlet below the climate control
Power outlet in the center console (if
equipped)
Power outlet in the cargo area (Outback)
Accessory power outlets are provided
below the climate control, in the center
console and in the cargo area. Electrical
power (12 V DC) from the battery is
available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-
ance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120 W. Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
or more outlets simultaneously, the total
power consumed by them must not ex-
ceed 120 W.
– CONTINUED –
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
6-9
6
(274,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlet.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not in
use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12 V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is 120 W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliances con-
nected to two or more outlets
simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not
exceed 120 W. Overloading the
accessory power outlet can
cause a short circuit. Do not use
double adapters or more than
one electrical appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord on
your electrical appliance will not
interfere with your shifting gears
and operating the accelerator
and brake pedals. If they do, do
not use the electrical appliance
while driving.
Upper compartment
Lower compartment
NOTE
When the lid of the center console is
closed, a gap remains between the
center console and the lid to allow the
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
6-10
(275,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
power outlet in the center console to be
used. Pass the cord of the electrical
appliance through this gap.
USB power supply (if
equipped)
S06AY
CAUTION
. The specification of a USB term-
inal that can be used is the A-
type. If a different specification of
terminal is connected, power
supply or charging may not be
possible, or the device may mal-
function.
. There is no guarantee even when
a connected device malfunctions
or data is damaged. The connec-
tion of a device shall be per-
formed at your responsibility.
. To avoid an electric shock or a
malfunction, observe the follow-
ing precautions.
– Do not connect a USB hub.
– Do not insert any metal or
other foreign object into the
USB terminal.
– Do not spill water or other
liquid on the USB terminal.
. When you have connected a
cable, pay attention not to pull
on the connected cable with your
legs. Otherwise, it may result in
injury to you by falling over, or a
malfunction of the connected
device.
. If a device is connected for a long
time when the engine is not
running, doing so may cause the
risk of a discharged battery. Even
when the engine is running, we
recommend that you do not con-
nect a device for an unnecessa-
rily long time.
. Do not connect a malfunctioning
device. Doing so may cause the
risk of smoke and fire.
NOTE
. The USB power supply is designed
to supply a maximum rated power of 5
V/2.1 A (The available electricity of the
two USB terminals is a maximum of 4.2
A.). Before connecting a device, be sure
to read the instruction manual of the
device and check whether or not this
specification of the output is supported
by the device. If a device that requires
power exceeding the maximum rating
is connected, power supply or charging
may not be possible. Even if charging
could be completed, the time required
for charging may be longer than when
the genuine charger for that device is
– CONTINUED –
Interior equipment/USB power supply
6-11
6
(276,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
used.
. Depending on the device, charging
may be possible only when a special
cable is used. In this case, be sure to
connect the device using the special
cable.
. When a device that communicates
with a PC is connected, power supply
or charging may not be possible.
. When connect a device for charging,
disconnect the device promptly after
charging is completed.
Front seat USB power supply (An audio
device can be connected and used)
Console USB power supply (power supply
function only) (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position and a USB electronic device
is connected to the USB terminal, 5 V DC
power can be supplied to the device. Use
the USB terminal to use or charge an
electronic device.
When using the terminal, open the USB
power supply cover. After use, close the
USB power supply cover.
Ashtray (if equipped)
S06AG
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Not doing so could result in a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lighted cigarette in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
Interior equipment/Ashtray
6-12
(277,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder. For the locations of the
cup holders, refer to “Cup holder” F6-7.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. When removing the ashtray from
a cup holder, pull the ashtray upwards.
Fully close the lid after using the ashtray to
help reduce residual smoke.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or another narrow-ended
implement.
Coat hook
S06AH
WARNING
Obey the following instructions.
. Do not hang coat hangers or
other hard or pointed objects on
the coat hooks. Hang clothing
directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
. Before hanging clothing on the
coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pock-
ets.
If these instructions are ignored, the
following may occur in sudden
stops or in a collision.
. serious injuries by the items
thrown through the cabin.
. incorrect SRS curtain airbag de-
ployment
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
The coat hook is attached to each rear
passenger’s hand grip.
Interior equipment/Coat hook
6-13
6
(278,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Shopping bag hook
S06AI
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
& Legacy
S06AI01
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
inner side wall of the trunk near the trunk
lid opening.
& Outback
S06AI02
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
To use the hook, push the upper portion
and the shopping bag hook will appear.
Store the hook after using it.
Convenient grip (Outback)
S06AX
CAUTION
. Do not hang items on the con-
venient grip that weigh 6 lbs (3
kg) or more. Depending on the
conditions of use (for example, in
low temperatures, etc.), the rear
gate may lower even with lighter
loads. However, this is not a
malfunction. Be careful not to hit
your head or other body parts.
. When using the convenient grip,
do not try to close the rear gate.
Doing so may cause the item on
the grip to be jammed in the rear
gate and damaged. Remove the
item from the grip before closing
the rear gate.
Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook
6-14
(279,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
A convenient grip is attached to the rear
gate trim. When the rear gate is open, you
can hang a candle lantern, wet suit, etc. on
the grip.
Floor mat
S06AJ
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
Interior equipment/Floor mat
6-15
6
(280,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Cargo area cover
(Outback – if equipped)
S06AK
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
S06AK01
To extend the cargo area cover:
1) Stopper
1. Hold the handle located at the center of
the cargo area cover and lift the handle
upward slightly to unlock the stoppers that
are located at the right and left end of the
cover.
2. Pull the handle toward you to extend
the cargo area cover. Then insert its hooks
into the catches as shown.
To rewind the cargo area cover:
1. Hold the handle located at the center of
the cargo area cover, pull it toward you and
lift up slightly to unlock the cargo area
cover from the catches.
1) Stopper
2. Slowly rewind the cargo area cover
completely. Then lift the handle upward
slightly to lock the stoppers.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)
6-16
(281,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover. Scratches
on the stays could cause leakage
of gas from the stays, which may
result in their inability to hold the
rear gate open.
. When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward
so that the cover is not damaged.
& To install the front cover
S06AK08
CAUTION
When reclining the rear seatback,
move the front cover backward so
that the cover is not damaged.
1. Align the right side of the front cover
with the triangle mark before fixing the
cover in place.
2. Push the front cover to the right side
and shorten the bar.
3. Align the left side of the front cover with
the triangle mark before fixing the cover in
place.
& To remove the front cover
S06AK09
1. Push the front cover to the right side
and shorten the bar.
2. Remove the front cover.
& To remove the cover housing
S06AK02
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Hold down the button on the right-hand
rear quarter panel and lift up the right-hand
cover housing.
3. Remove the cover housing.
– CONTINUED –
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)
6-17
6
(282,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Stowage of the cargo area
cover
S06AK04
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
1. To open the lid, pull the handle up.
2. To keep the lid open, hang the hook
(provided on the back of the lid) on the rear
edge of the roof.
3. Remove the left and right parts of the
cargo floor lid.
4. Turn the cover housing 180 degrees
toward the front.
5. Insert the left end of the cover housing
into the retainer.
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)
6-18
(283,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
6. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
& To take out the stowed cover
housing
S06AK10
1. Raise the right side of the cover
housing.
2. Take out the cover housing by pulling it
toward you.
& To install the cover housing
S06AK05
1. Insert both ends of the cover housing
into the retainers.
2. Make sure to fix the front part of the
cargo area cover behind the rear seat.
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (Outback – if equipped)
6-19
6
(284,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Convenient tie-down hooks
(Outback)
S06AM
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 110
lbs (50 kg) per hook.
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the storing
recesses.
Under-floor storage compart-
ment
S06AN
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the trunk or
cargo area and can be used to store small
items. To open the lid, pull the tab or
handle up.
NOTE
When storing a flat tire, put the subfloor
storage in the trunk or cargo area.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the sub-
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the subfloor storage
compartment.
Interior equipment/Convenient tie-down hooks (Outback)
6-20
(285,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Legacy Outback
For Outback, hang the hook provided on
the underside of the lid on the rear edge of
the roof to keep the lid open.
Interior equipment/Under-floor storage compartment
6-21
6
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(287,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S07
Fuel .......................................................................... 7-3
Fuel requirements.................................................. 7-3
Fuel filler lid and cap ............................................. 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only) .........................7-7
Preparing to drive ................................................... 7-8
Starting and stopping the engine (models
without push-button ignition switch) ................. 7-9
General precautions when starting/stopping
engine ................................................................. 7-9
Starting engine ...................................................... 7-9
Stopping the engine..............................................7-10
Steering lock ........................................................ 7-11
Starting and stopping engine (models with
push-button start system)................................. 7-11
Safety precautions ................................................ 7-11
Operating range for push-button start system ....... 7-11
Starting engine ..................................................... 7-11
Stopping engine....................................................7-13
When access key fob does not operate properly ...7-13
Steering lock ........................................................7-13
Remote engine start system (dealer option) ...... 7-14
Models with “keyless access with push-button
start system” ...................................................... 7-15
Models without “keyless access with push-button
start system” ...................................................... 7-16
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start.................................................................... 7-19
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown............................................................7-19
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle................................................................7-19
Service mode (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)......................... 7-19
Remote transmitter program (models without
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)............................................................ 7-20
System maintenance............................................. 7-20
Certification for remote engine starter................... 7-22
Continuously variable transmission ................... 7-22
Select lever .......................................................... 7-23
Shift lock function ................................................ 7-25
Selection of manual mode .................................... 7-27
Driving tips........................................................... 7-28
Power steering...................................................... 7-28
Braking .................................................................. 7-29
Braking tips.......................................................... 7-29
Brake system ....................................................... 7-30
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators................ 7-30
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)............................. 7-31
ABS self-check ..................................................... 7-31
ABS warning light................................................. 7-31
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ................................................................ 7-31
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions............. 7-32
Vehicle Dynamics Control system ...................... 7-33
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor ............ 7-34
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................... 7-34
X-MODE (Outback)................................................ 7-35
To activate/deactivate the X-MODE........................ 7-36
Hill descent control function ................................. 7-37
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) ....................................................... 7-38
Starting and operating
7
(288,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
TPMS screen ........................................................7-40
Parking your vehicle............................................. 7-40
Electronic parking brake .......................................7-40
Parking tips .......................................................... 7-45
Cruise control ....................................................... 7-45
To set cruise control ............................................. 7-46
To temporarily cancel the cruise control................7-47
To turn off the cruise control.................................7-47
To change the cruising speed ............................... 7-48
Cruise control indicator ........................................ 7-49
Cruise control set indicator ................................... 7-49
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) ....................................... 7-49
System features....................................................7-50
System operation..................................................7-52
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
buzzer ................................................................7-53
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator ...................................... 7-55
BSD/RCTA warning indicator ................................ 7-55
BSD/RCTA OFF switch.......................................... 7-56
Certification for the BSD/RCTA ............................. 7-56
Handling of radar sensors .................................... 7-58
Reverse Automatic Braking System
(if equipped) ....................................................... 7-59
Reverse Automatic Braking System overview........ 7-60
Operating conditions ............................................ 7-60
Reverse Automatic Braking System operation....... 7-63
Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking
system operation............................................... 7-66
RAB warning indicator.......................................... 7-67
Reverse Automatic Braking system ON/OFF
setting............................................................... 7-67
Handling of the sonar sensors .............................. 7-68
Starting and operating
(289,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Fuel
S07AA
CAUTION
. Use of a fuel which is low in
quality or use of an inappropriate
fuel additive may cause damage
to the engine and/or fuel system.
. Some gas stations, particularly
those in high altitude areas, offer
fuels posted as regular octane
gasoline with an octane rating
below 87AKI (90RON). Use of
those fuels are not recom-
mended.
& Fuel requirements
S07AA01
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
S07AA0103
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating
can cause persistent and heavy knocking,
which can damage the engine. Do not be
concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. See your dealer or a
qualified service technician if you use a
fuel with the specified octane rating and
your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! RON
S07AA010301
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
! AKI
S07AA010302
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane num-
bers and is commonly referred to as the
Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline
S07AA0104
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Reformulated gasoline
S07AA0128
SUBARU supports the use of reformulated
gasoline when available. Reformulated
gasoline has been blended to burn more
cleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.
! MMT
S07AA0106
Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-
cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-
pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
S07AA0107
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-
taining alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-
ditives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your
vehicle, but should contain no more than
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Fuel
7-3
7
(290,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
10% ethanol for the proper operation of
your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 10% ethanol, including from any
pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85 (which
are only some examples of fuel containing
more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gasolines,
which are designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station op-
erators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line before seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
S07AA02
! Refueling
S07AA0201
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Stop the vehicle and turn off the
engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor at
the left of the driver’s seat.
Starting and operating/Fuel
7-4
(291,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Legacy
2) Outback
3. Open the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to discharge any sta-
tic electricity that may be present on
your body. If your body is carrying
an electrostatic charge, there is a
possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
4. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adja-
cent area. Refueling must be
performed outside. Quickly wipe
up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the left.
Do not remove the cap quickly.
Fuel may be under pressure and
spray out of the fuel filler neck,
especially in hot weather. If you
hear a hissing sound while you
are removing the cap, wait for the
sound to stop and then slowly
open the cap to prevent fuel from
spraying out and creating a fire
hazard.
5. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Fuel
7-5
7
(292,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
6. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
7. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
8. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
If you spill any fuel on the painted
surface, rinse it off immediately.
Otherwise, the painted surface
could be damaged.
NOTE
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until
it clicks or if the tether is caught under
the cap, the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light may
illuminate. Refer to “CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunction indicator
light” F3-15.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could oc-
cur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit, and
your fuel tank and emission con-
trol system may be damaged. It
could also lead to fuel spillage
and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank could
cause damage to the engine.
Continuing to operate your vehi-
cle at an extremely low fuel level
may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
Starting and operating/Fuel
7-6
(293,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
S07AB
WARNING
Only use a four-wheel dynamometer
when testing an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) model.
Testing of an AWD model must
NEVER be performed on a single
two-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-
ing to do so will result in uncon-
trolled vehicle movement and may
cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspection
of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-
amination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a
few days to reset the readiness monitors
and return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)
7-7
7
(294,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected in
an attempt to bypass AWD for state
emission testing. An AWD vehicle must
be tested using an AWD dynamometer
with all 4 wheels driven and loaded.
Preparing to drive
S07AC
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk (Legacy)
and rear gate (Outback) are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and
outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
10. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cool-
ing fan and belts of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
NOTE
. Engine oil, engine coolant, brake
fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-
ler hitch (Outback – if equipped)” F8-
19.
Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
7-8
(295,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Starting and stopping the en-
gine (models without push-
button ignition switch)
S07BD
& General precautions when
starting/stopping engine
S07BD06
WARNING
. Never start the engine from out-
side the vehicle (except when
using the remote engine start
system). It may result in an acci-
dent.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flammable
substances. The exhaust pipe
and exhaust emissions can cre-
ate a fire hazard at high tempera-
tures.
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may over-
heat and burn.
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid racing and rapid acceleration
immediately after the engine has
started.
. Until the engine is warmed up suffi-
ciently, the engine speed is maintained
high. The engine speed will gradually
drop as the engine warms up.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel used and the driving condition
(repeated short trips when the engine
is not warmed up sufficiently). In such a
case, it is recommended to switch to a
different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knock-
ing may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly such
as a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-
eration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
& Starting engine
S07BD01
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the starter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
. It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
starter is cranking.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button ignition switch)
7-9
7
(296,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position). The
starter will only operate when the select
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-12.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is applied, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the ac-
celerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure
that the select lever is at the “P” or “N”
position and that the parking brake is
applied.
& Stopping the engine
S07BD02
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK/
OFF” position.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button ignition switch)
7-10
(297,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Steering lock
S07BD07
After stopping the engine and the key is
removed from ignition switch, the steering
wheel will be locked due to the steering
lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically canceled.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
S07BD0701
When you cannot unlock the steering
wheel, perform the following steps.
1. Check that the parking brake is ap-
plied.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-
sories.
3. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
If you cannot unlock the steering wheel by
doing the steps, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Starting and stopping engine
(models with push-button
start system)
S07BE
& Safety precautions
S07BE06
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-11.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
S07BE01
Refer to “Operating range for push-button
start system” F3-6.
& Starting engine
S07BE03
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General precau-
tions when starting/stopping en-
gine” F7-9.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be a
malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. If the indicator on the push-but-
ton ignition switch is flashing in
green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. While moving the
steering wheel right and left,
depress the brake pedal, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pressing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop press-
ing the push-button ignition
switch. Instead, press the push-
button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to
switch the power status to
“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and then
press the push-button ignition
switch to start the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
7-11
7
(298,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
. When pressing the push-button igni-
tion switch while depressing the brake
pedal:
– The engine starter operates for a
maximum of 10 seconds and after
starting the engine, the starter stops
automatically.
– The engine can be started regard-
less of the power status.
. If the engine does not start, check
the security indicator light. Then press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to “OFF”.
– If the light had illuminated, try to
start the engine again.
– If the light had been off, press the
push-button ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal more
forcefully.
. The engine start procedures may not
function depending on the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such
a case, refer to “Starting engine” F9-
20.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
Charge the battery.
. Until the engine is warmed up suffi-
ciently, the engine speed will be main-
tained high. The engine speed will
decrease as the engine warms up.
. Do not shift the select lever while the
starter is cranking.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting proce-
dure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the “P”
position.
4. Depress the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the “P”
position.
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start procedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
7-12
(299,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Stopping engine
S07BE04
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great-
er foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater force
will be required to steer, and it
may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
& When access key fob does
not operate properly
S07BE05
Refer to “Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly” F9-19.
& Steering lock
S07BE07
After stopping the engine and the driver’s
door is open, the steering wheel will be
locked due to the steering lock function.
When the engine is restarted, the steering
lock will be automatically canceled.
! When the steering lock cannot be
released
S07BE0701
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When you cannot restart the engine due to
the steering lock, check the status of
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)
7-13
7
(300,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
operation indicator and perform the follow-
ing steps.
! Operation indicator flashing in
green
S07BE070101
1. Check that the select lever is set in the
“P” position.
2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
while turning the steering wheel left and
right.
! Operation indicator flashing in
orange
S07BE070102
There may be a malfunction in the steering
lock function. Immediately contact your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
S07AZ
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “General precau-
tions when starting/stopping en-
gine” F7-9.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in an
enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful build-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the sys-
tem from unexpectedly starting
the engine.
The remote engine start system allows you
to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
In addition, the remote engine start system
can activate the heater or air conditioner,
providing you with a comfortable cabin
upon entry.
NOTE
The length of time for which it is
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-14
(301,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Models with “keyless access
with push-button start sys-
tem”
S07AZ14
NOTE
For more details, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system.
Access key fob
1) Lock button
An access key fob can be used as the
remote engine start transmitter. Operate
the lock button to start or stop the engine
as follows.
! Before starting the engine
S07AZ1401
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors including the rear gate are
closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! When starting the engine
S07AZ1402
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once
and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock button
briefly again. The hazard warning flashers
then flash once again, and the keyless
buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash three times, and the
horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
! When stopping the engine
S07AZ1403
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
! Automatic engine shutdown
S07AZ1404
The remote engine start system will auto-
matically shut down or will not start the
engine under the following conditions.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. Any door or the rear gate is opened.
. The select lever is moved to any
position other than “P”.
. The engine hood is opened.
. The push-button ignition switch is
pressed.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or more.
The time until the engine automatically
stops differs according to the setting.
To change the time until the engine
automatically stops, contact your
SUBARU dealer. However, local laws
and regulations may prohibit changing this
time.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-15
7
(302,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Models without “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system”
S07AZ15
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
1) Fob button
! Starting the engine
S07AZ1504
NOTE
All vehicle doors (including rear gate/
trunk lid) and the engine hood must be
closed prior to activating the remote
engine start system. Any open entry
point will prevent starting or cause the
engine to stop.
The remote engine start system is acti-
vated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
operating range of the system and the start
request is received, the following will
occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
If the fob is not within range (the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
indicate two long flashes without beeping.
The system will check certain safety
preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the engine will start
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
the following will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote
engine start system, the following will
occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine
start system will power off and then
attempt to start the engine 3 additional
times. The system will not attempt to
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
malfunction is preventing starting. If the
engine does not start after 3 additional
attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
! Stopping the engine
S07AZ1505
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is
not received (for example, if the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
! Remote start safety features
S07AZ1502
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the engine if running) and
sound the horn twice if any of the following
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
will flash and beep 3 times.
. The brake pedal is depressed
. A key is in the ignition switch
. The engine hood is open
. The remote start system “Service
mode” is engaged
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-16
(303,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
RPM
. The security alarm is triggered
. The select lever is not in the “P” position
If the system detects any door (including
the rear gate/trunk lid) open during opera-
tion, it will prevent starting or stop the
engine, and sound the horn and flash side
marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights
6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter acti-
vation (the security indicator light on
the combination meter is not flashing),
the alarm system will be armed.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
S07AZ1506
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate status of the system
using the following flash and beep se-
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
tional range of the system.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-17
7
(304,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Precondition
Fob Indication
Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed
Continuous while button is
held down
— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob
button twice within 3 sec
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
Engine idling by remote engine start operation
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps
Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and
holding fob button for at least 2 sec.
3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
1 flash every 3 sec —
Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-18
(305,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Entering the vehicle while it is
running via remote start
S07AZ03
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function (if equipped) or
remote keyless entry system, then open
the door(s). If the vehicle’s doors are
unlocked manually using the key, the
vehicle’s alarm system will trigger when a
door is opened (if the alarm system is
armed prior to activating the remote
engine start system) and the engine will
turn off. Perform either of the following
procedures to disarm the alarm system.
Refer to “Alarm system” F2-29.
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the “ON” position (models
without “keyless access with push-
button start system”)
. Push the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”)
. Press any button on the access key
fob/remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door or rear gate is opened.
4. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn to the
“START” position to restart the engine. For
models with “keyless access with push-
button start system”, press the push-
button ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal to restart the engine.
& Entering the vehicle following
remote engine start shut-
down
S07AZ10
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
system/keyless access function within a
few seconds immediately following remote
engine start shutdown.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
S07AZ04
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting and
operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Service mode (models with-
out “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
S07AZ05
In service mode, the remote engine start
function is temporarily disabled to prevent
the system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
To engage or disengage service mode:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle
doors and the rear gate/trunk lid.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”
position.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
5. Press and release the remote engine
start transmitter “
” button three times.
The system will honk the vehicle’s horn
each time the button is pressed.
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to
indicate that the service mode has been
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
system.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-19
7
(306,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Remote transmitter program
(models without “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system”)
S07AZ13
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed accord-
ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“LOCK”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”, back
to “ON” then “LOCK”, then back to “ON”
again and leave the ignition “ON” through-
out the programming process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode.
5. Press and release the “
” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon
successful programming, the remote start
confirmation transmitter button will flash
one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“LOCK” position, the door is closed or after
2 minutes.
& System maintenance
S07AZ09
NOTE
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle a
minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
synchronize.
! Changing the batteries
S07AZ0901
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing battery of access key fob” F11-50.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2032)
supplied in your remote engine start
transmitter should last approximately one
year, depending on usage. When the
battery begins to weaken, you will notice
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-20
(307,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter battery.
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
cated on the back side of the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove the
battery and replace with a new one. Be
sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
battery before removing it to ensure that
the new battery is inserted properly (bat-
tery “+” should be pointed away from the
transmitter circuit board on the battery).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
To comply with the FCC RF exposure
compliance requirements, no change
to the antenna or the device is per-
mitted. Any change to the antenna or
the device could result in the device
exceeding the RF exposure require-
ments and void user’s authority to
operate the device.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-21
7
(308,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Certification for remote en-
gine starter
S07AZ23
! U.S.-spec. models
S07AZ2301
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
! Canada-spec. models
S07AZ2302
Continuously variable trans-
mission
S07BG
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed. It also has a manual mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to lurch forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Observe the following precau-
tions. Failure to observe these
precautions could cause damage
to the transmission.
– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-
tion only after the vehicle has
completely stopped.
– Do not shift from the “D”
position into the “R” position
or vice versa until the vehicle
has completely stopped.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-22
(309,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set
in the “R” position. Doing so may
result in an unexpected accident
or malfunction.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for a
long time with the select lever in
any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
shift to higher engine speeds than
when the coolant temperature is suffi-
ciently high in order to shorten the
warm-up time and improve driveability.
The gearshift timing will automatically
shift to the normal timing after the
engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving under continuous hea-
vy load conditions such as towing a
camper or climbing a long, steep hill,
the engine speed, vehicle speed and air
conditioning system cooling perfor-
mance may automatically be reduced.
This is not a malfunction. This phenom-
enon results from the engine control
function maintaining the cooling per-
formance of the vehicle. The engine
and vehicle speed will return to a
normal speed when the engine is able
to maintain the optimum cooling per-
formance after the heavy load de-
creases. Driving under a heavy load
must be performed with extreme care.
Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
when driving on an uphill slope while
towing.
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that pro-
vides superior transmission efficiency
for maximum fuel economy. At times,
depending on varying driving condi-
tions, a chain operating noise may be
heard that is characteristic of this type
of system.
& Select lever
S07BG01
1) Select lever button
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-23
7
(310,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button in
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has a manual gate for
using the manual mode.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position, the engine is controlled so
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed hard.
! P (Park)
S07BG0101
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you should depress the
brake pedal fully then move the select
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
S07BG0102
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement
of the select lever from the “N” to “R”
position is possible for a limited time period
by depressing the brake pedal, and then it
becomes impossible. For details, refer to
“Shift lock function” F7-25.
! N (Neutral)
S07BG0103
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
NOTE
If the select lever is in the “N” position
when you stop the engine for parking,
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If
this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the “P”
position.
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-24
(311,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! D (Drive)
S07BG0104
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration you
require. Also, while driving up and down a
hill, the transmission assists and controls
the driving performance and engine brak-
ing while corresponding to the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmis-
sion. When you release the pedal, the
transmission will return to the original gear
position.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
! While climbing a grade
S07BG010401
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift is
prevented from taking place when the
accelerator is released. This minimizes
the chance of subsequent downshifting to
a lower gear when accelerating again. This
prevents repeated upshifting and down-
shifting resulting in a smoother operation
of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift, de-
pending on the way the accelerator
pedal is depressed to accelerate the
vehicle again.
& Shift lock function
S07BG04
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position before
the brake pedal is depressed. Depress the
brake pedal first, and then operate the
select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the key from the “ACC” position to the
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder (models without
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the push-button ignition switch to the
“OFF” position (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
may not be moved to the “P” position after
a period of time. Therefore, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
brake pedal depressed soon after the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
! Shift lock release
S07BG0401
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion” F7-26.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the ignition
switch in the “ACC” position, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-25
7
(312,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release portion” F7-26.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release portion
S07BG0402
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Push the lower part of the lid lightly to
open the pocket.
1) Hole
3. Turn over the inner trim of the pocket.
4. Remove the grip portion of the screw-
driver.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert the screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release portion using the
screwdriver, and then move the select
lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection as
soon as possible.
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-26
(313,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Selection of manual mode
S07BG02
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate. The gear
position indicator shows the currently
selected gear in the 1st-to-6th (3.6 L
models)/7th (2.5 L models) gear range.
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gearshift is possible. When the
upshift indicator “
” is on, upshifting is
possible. When the downshift indicator
“
” is on, downshifting is possible. When
both indicators are on, upshifting and
downshifting are both possible. When the
vehicle stops (for example, at traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
While driving with the select lever in the “D”
position, if you change gears by operating
the shift paddle, the gear position indicator
light illuminates and shows the current
gear condition.
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on the
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-27
7
(314,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
shift paddles. Doing so may result in
accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when the
engine speed is too high, i.e., when a
downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light will illuminate.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and let the engine idle until the
warning light turns off.
& Driving tips
S07BG05
NOTE
If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed at the same time, driving
torque may be restrained. This is not a
malfunction.
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Make sure to apply the parking brake
when parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the “D”
position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur in the models with a 3.6 L engine
before the engine warms up.
Power steering
S07AJ
Power steering warning light
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the com-
bination meter illuminates to inform the
driver that the warning system is function-
ing properly. Then, if the engine started,
the warning light turns off to inform the
driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
While the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
Starting and operating/Power steering
7-28
(315,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period of
time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too frequently,
this may result in a malfunction of the
power steering control system.
Braking
S07AK
& Braking tips
S07AK01
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
S07AK0101
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
S07AK0102
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help
prevent this, shift into a lower gear to get
stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
S07AK0103
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Braking
7-29
7
(316,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
S07AK02
! Two separate circuits
S07AK0201
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
S07AK0202
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not turn
off the engine while driving because that
will turn off the brake booster, resulting in
poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much harder
than normal and the braking distance will
increase.
! Brake assist system
S07AK0203
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake pedal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal is
applied by lighter force and generates a
greater braking force.
. You might hear the sound of ABS
operating from the engine compart-
ment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
S07AK03
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle inspected by
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
Starting and operating/Braking
7-30
(317,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
S07AL
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with an ABS equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy road, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample
distance from other vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when the
ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
& ABS self-check
S07AL01
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating noise of the
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
being carried out and does not indicate any
abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light
S07AL02
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-18.
Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD) system
S07AM
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of the
braking force. It functions by adjusting the
distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
function fails, the EBD system also stops
working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
7-31
7
(318,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
S07AM01
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehicle’s
motion may therefore become somewhat
harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flat
location.
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the
engine.
3. Restart the engine.
4. Release the parking brake.
Even if both warning lights turn off:
The EBD system may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after restarting
the engine:
1. Turn off the engine again.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
about checking the brake fluid level, refer
to “Checking the fluid level” F11-19.
. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”
mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,
have the vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the
brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether the
brakes are operating properly, do
not drive the vehicle. Have your
vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
7-32
(319,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
S07AN
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driv-
ing – overconfidence because you
are driving with a Vehicle Dynamics
Control system equipped vehicle
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performed by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly.
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– When replacing a flat tire, use
only the specified temporary
spare tire. However, even with
the specified temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of the
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system will be reduced.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is indicated by
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is indicated by
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
7-33
7
(320,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
flashing of the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehicle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operating noise from the en-
gine compartment is heard briefly
when starting the engine and when
driving off after starting the engine.
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the following circumstances, the
vehicle may be less stable than it feels
to the driver. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control System may therefore operate.
Such operation does not indicate a
system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is towing a
trailer (Outback)
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
S07AN01
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light” F3-23 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-
24.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
S07AN02
Pressing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch deactivates the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system.
Creating an adequate driving wheel slip by
deactivating the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system temporarily may help to escape
from the following situations. Use the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch as
necessary.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehicle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
7-34
(321,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated. When
the switch is pressed again to reactivate
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light turns off.
You should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
the above-mentioned situations.
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem helps prevent unstable vehicle
motion such as skidding using con-
trol of the brakes and engine power.
Do not turn off the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system unless it is abso-
lutely necessary. If you must turn off
the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully based on
the road surface condition.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
formance is comparable with that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely neces-
sary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
light illuminates.
X-MODE (Outback)
S07BI
WARNING
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with X-MODE could easily lead to
a serious accident.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving a vehicle
with hill descent control function
could easily lead to a serious
accident. Be especially careful,
and depress the brake pedal if
necessary when driving on ex-
tremely steep downhill, frozen,
muddy or sandy roads. Failure
to control the vehicle’s speed
may cause a loss of control and
result in a serious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with X-MODE, winter tires should
be used when driving on snow-
covered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having X-
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/X-MODE (Outback)
7-35
7
(322,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
MODE does not guarantee that
the vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activate the X-MODE when you
encounter a very slippery surface
at low speed. However, having X-
MODE is no guarantee that full
vehicle control will be maintained
at all times and under all condi-
tions. When activating X-MODE,
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have the system in-
spected by an authorized
SUBARU dealer.
. Observe the following precau-
tions in order to ensure that the
X-MODE is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four
tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
label attached to the vehicle’s
door pillar.
– When replacing a flat tire, use
only the specified temporary
spare tire shown on the tire
placard. However, even with
the specified temporary spare
tire, the effectiveness of the X-
MODE will be reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
. If the hill descent control function
has operated continuously for a
long time, the temperature of the
brake disc may increase and the
hill descent control function may
be temporarily disabled. In this
case, the hill descent control
indicator will disappear. When
the hill descent control indicator
disappears, the hill descent con-
trol function is disabled.
X-MODE is the integrated control system
of the engine, AWD and Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, etc. for driving with bad
road conditions. Using X-MODE, you can
drive more comfortably even in slippery
road conditions including uphill and down-
hill.
X-MODE has the following functions.
. Hill descent control function:
Using the hill descent control function, you
can keep the vehicle at a consistent speed
driving downhill. If the vehicle speed is
likely to increase, the brake control system
will be activated to adjust the vehicle
speed.
. Driving ability control:
This mode increases the hill-climbing
ability and driving ability as well as
enabling smooth application of torque for
easier control of the steering wheel.
& To activate/deactivate the X-
MODE
S07BI01
X-MODE switch
Starting and operating/X-MODE (Outback)
7-36
(323,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
X-MODE indicator
To activate:
Press the X-MODE switch. While the X-
MODE is activated, the X-MODE indicator
appears.
To deactivate:
Press the X-MODE switch again. The X-
MODE indicator will disappear when the X-
MODE is deactivated.
NOTE
. Even if you try to activate the X-
MODE by pressing the X-MODE switch
when the vehicle speed is 12 mph (20
km/h) or more, the X-MODE will not be
activated. At this time, a buzzer will
sound twice.
. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more while the X-MODE is
activated, a buzzer will sound once and
the X-MODE will be deactivated.
. While the engine is running, if any of
the following conditions is met, the X-
MODE will be deactivated. In this case,
it is not possible to activate the X-
MODE.
– The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illu-
minates.
– The AT OIL TEMP warning light
flashes.
– The ABS warning light illumi-
nates.
– The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light illuminates.
. If the engine could overheat because
of a temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it may not be possible to
activate the X-MODE. Even while the
X-MODE is activated, the X-MODE will
be deactivated when the engine coolant
temperature increases.
& Hill descent control function
S07BI03
The hill descent control function will be in
standby mode when the X-MODE is
activated and the vehicle speed is less
than approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
The function will operate when the vehicle
speed is less than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is less
than approximately 10%.
The function will turn off when the vehicle
speed is more than approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
CAUTION
The braking power of the hill des-
cent control function may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when towing
a trailer (Outback)).
NOTE
. Even while the hill descent control
function is operating, you can vary the
vehicle speed by using the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal.
. During braking by the hill descent
control function, the hill descent con-
trol indicator will flash.
. The hill descent control function is
operable regardless of the gradient of
the road.
. The hill descent control function
may be considered normal when the
following conditions occur.
– An operating sound is heard
briefly from the engine compart-
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/X-MODE (Outback)
7-37
7
(324,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
ment while the hill descent control
function is operating.
– The sensation of depressing the
brake pedal is different, (harder than
usual etc.) when the brake pedal is
depressed during hill descent con-
trol function operation.
! Hill descent control indicator
S07BI0301
This indicator appears while the hill des-
cent control function is in the standby
mode. It flashes while the function is
operating. It will disappear when the
function is in the disabled mode. When
this function is changed from operational
to non-operational, it will disappear when
the vehicle speed reaches more than
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h).
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
S07AO
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, this
system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a sharp
object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures in-
crease accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly be-
fore adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on the
tire placard. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” F11-22. The tire pres-
sure monitoring system does not
function when the vehicle is sta-
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
7-38
(325,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
tionary. After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS rechecking of
the tire inflation pressures. If the
tire pressures are now above the
severe low pressure threshold,
the low tire pressure warning
light should turn off a few min-
utes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for ap-
proximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system in-
spected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
ing system will not function prop-
erly.
FCC ID: CWTD1G049
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
7-39
7
(326,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& TPMS screen
S07AO05
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic screens” F3-39.
Parking your vehicle
S07AP
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do not park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If engine
exhaust gas enters the passen-
ger compartment, occupants in
the vehicle could die from carbon
monoxide (CO) contained in the
exhaust gas.
& Electronic parking brake
S07AP03
1) Parking brake switch
2) Indicator light
3) Release the electronic parking brake
4) Apply the electronic parking brake
WARNING
. Before exiting the vehicle, make
sure that you turn off the engine.
Otherwise, the parking brake may
be released and an accident may
occur.
. If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunc-
tioning. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe location, use tire
stops under the tires to prevent
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
7-40
(327,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
the vehicle from moving and
contact your SUBARU dealer.
. If the electronic parking brake is
operated under the following
conditions, the electronic park-
ing brake indicator light may
flash.
– the brake is overheated
– the vehicle is on a steep slope
In such cases, the vehicle may
start to move which may lead to
an accident. Always use the tire
stops.
CAUTION
. When the electronic parking
brake cannot be applied due to a
malfunction, contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection. If you have to park
your vehicle in such conditions,
perform the following procedure.
– Stop your vehicle in a flat
location.
– Shift the select lever in the “P”
position. When the select le-
ver cannot be shifted into the
“P” position, you must release
shift lock. Refer to “Shift lock
function” F7-25.
– Use tire stops under the tires
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
. Never drive with the parking
brake applied in order to avoid
unnecessary wear on the brake
linings. Before starting to drive,
always make sure that the park-
ing brake has been released and
that the electronic parking brake
indicator light has turned off.
. The braking power of the electro-
nic parking brake may not be
sufficient when strong braking
power is needed (e.g., when park-
ing on a steep slope while towing
a trailer (Outback)).
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
parking brake. You can apply/release the
parking brake by operating the parking
brake switch.
To apply: Depress the brake pedal and
pull up the parking brake switch.
To release: Press the parking brake
switch firmly while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
Electronic parking brake indicator light
When the parking brake is applied while
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the following indicator lights illuminate.
. the indicator light on the parking brake
switch
. the electronic parking brake indicator
light on the combination meter (for details,
refer to “Electronic parking brake indicator
light” F3-21.)
NOTE
. The parking brake will not be re-
leased under the following conditions
even if the parking brake switch is
pressed.
– The ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
– The brake pedal is not depressed.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
7-41
7
(328,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. The electronic parking brake system
uses motors to apply the parking brake.
Therefore, operating sounds from the
motors will be heard when applying or
releasing the parking brake. Make sure
that the motor sounds are heard when
applying or releasing the parking
brake.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction or the elec-
tronic parking brake operation is pro-
hibited temporarily, if the parking brake
switch is operated, a chirp sound is
heard and the electronic parking brake
indicator light flashes.
. When you cannot release the park-
ing brake due to, for example, a system
malfunction, contact your SUBARU
dealer and have your SUBARU dealer
release the parking brake.
. If the operation of the electronic
parking brake switch is stopped mid-
way or performed extremely slowly, the
system may detect an error and turn on
the brake system warning light. How-
ever, this does not indicate a malfunc-
tion if the warning light turns off after
operating the switch.
. When the electronic parking brake
has not been used for a long period of
time, the electronic parking brake may
operate automatically after the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position. This occurs due to checking
the proper operation of the electronic
parking brake and does not indicate a
malfunction.
. If the electronic parking brake
switch is malfunctioning and the elec-
tronic parking brake cannot be re-
leased, refer to the instructions de-
scribed in “Automatic release function
by accelerator pedal” F7-42.
. After activating the electronic park-
ing brake, you may hear a short sound
several minutes after the electronic
parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the electronic parking
brake switch illuminate as the system
confirms proper engagement. This
sound is different from the apply and
release sound.
This can occur:
– If the brakes are extremely hot.
– If the car is parked on a steep
incline.
– If the electronic parking brake is
applied after the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
This is a normal operating sound under
any of these conditions.
! Automatic release function by ac-
celerator pedal
S07AP0301
The electronic parking brake system has
an automatic release function. The parking
brake will be automatically released by
depressing the accelerator pedal. How-
ever, the automatic release function does
not operate under the following conditions.
. Any door (other than the trunk lid or rear
gate) is open.
. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
If the parking brake is automatically
released, the electronic parking brake
indicator light and the indicator light on
the parking brake switch turn off.
NOTE
Even if you have applied the parking
brake, the parking brake will be auto-
matically released when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
! Hill Holder function
S07AP0302
The electronic parking brake system has a
Hill Holder function. If the Hill Holder
function is activated, the parking brake will
be automatically applied when stopping on
an uphill slope with the brake pedal
depressed. In this case, the electronic
parking brake indicator light and the
indicator light on the parking brake switch
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
7-42
(329,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
illuminate.
The Hill Holder function also operates
while driving uphill in reverse.
NOTE
. The Hill Holder function may not
activate on a gentle uphill slope. In this
case, manually apply the electronic
parking brake.
. If you do not depress the brake pedal
sufficiently, the Hill Holder function
may not operate properly. However,
this is not a malfunction. When stop-
ping on an uphill slope, depress the
brake pedal firmly and release it after
the electronic parking brake indicator
light illuminates.
. Depending on the condition of the
road surface and braking force, the
brakes operate temporarily and feel
different than usual.
. When the electronic parking brake
system has a malfunction while the Hill
Holder function is activated, a chirp
sound is heard, the Hill Holder indicator
light turns off and the brake system
warning light turns on.
. When the hill holder activates on a
slope, the electronic parking brake is
engaged. The electronic parking brake
will release when you accelerate from
the stop. If you manually release the
electronic parking brake while the hill
holder is activated, the hill holder
function is canceled and will not re-
engage until the vehicle has moved
some distance. In that case, you will
need to manually engage the electronic
parking brake if needed.
! Hill Holder switch
S07AP030201
WARNING
When stopping on an uphill slope
with the Hill Holder function acti-
vated, release the brake pedal after
the electronic parking brake indica-
tor light has illuminated. Otherwise,
the Hill Holder function may not
operate properly and an accident
may occur.
You can activate/deactivate the Hill Holder
function by pressing the Hill Holder switch.
Deactivate the Hill Holder function under
the following conditions.
. When towing a trailer (Outback)
. When carrying a heavy load
. When you do not frequently use the
parking brake when stopping on an uphill
slope
NOTE
. If the Hill Holder switch is pressed
for more than 30 seconds, the Hill
Holder indicator light turns off and the
system ignores any further pressing of
the switch. To activate the switch again,
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and restart the engine.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
7-43
7
(330,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. When the Hill Holder function is
deactivated while the Hill Holder func-
tion has a malfunction, if you press the
Hill Holder switch, a chirp sounds.
! Hill Holder indicator light
S07AP030202
When the Hill Holder function is activated,
the Hill Holder indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “Hill Holder indicator light” F3-22.
! Emergency brake
S07AP0303
CAUTION
Use the emergency brake only in
case of an emergency. If the emer-
gency brake is excessively used, the
brake parts will wear down faster or
the brake may not work sufficiently
due to brake overheating.
NOTE
. While using the emergency brake,
the electronic parking brake indicator
light and the indicator light on the
parking brake switch illuminate and a
chirp sounds.
. While using the emergency brake, a
sound may be heard from the engine
compartment. This is the operating
sound of the brake that is activated by
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system,
and does not indicate a malfunction.
If the foot brake has a malfunction, you can
stop the vehicle by pulling the parking
brake switch continuously.
While applying the emergency brake, the
electronic parking brake indicator light and
the indicator light on the parking brake
switch illuminate and a chirp sounds.
! Electronic parking brake system
warning
S07AP0304
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light
turns on, the electronic parking
brake system may be malfunction-
ing. Immediately stop your vehicle in
the nearest safe location and con-
tact your SUBARU dealer.
If a malfunction occurs in the electronic
parking brake system, the brake system
warning light turns on. Refer to “Electronic
parking brake system warning” F3-20.
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
7-44
(331,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Parking tips
S07AP02
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake.
. Place the select lever in the “P” (Park)
position.
Never rely on the transmission alone to
hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel as described here. When
the vehicle is headed up the hill, the front
wheels should be turned away from the
curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
Cruise control
S07AQ
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 20
mph (30 km/h) or more.
WARNING
. Do not use the cruise control
under any of the following condi-
tions. These may cause loss of
vehicle control.
– driving up or down a steep
grade
– driving on slippery or winding
roads
– driving in heavy traffic
– towing a trailer (Outback)
. When using the cruise control,
always set the speed appropri-
ately according to the speed limit,
traffic flow, road conditions, and
other conditions.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Cruise control
7-45
7
(332,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is not
in use to avoid unintentionally setting
of the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
S07AQ01
Cruise control main button
1. Press the cruise control main button.
Cruise control indicator
The cruise control indicator on the combi-
nation meter will appear.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release the
accelerator pedal.
NOTE
When setting a cruise speed for the first
time during a drive, both “SET” and
“RES” may be used to set the initial
cruise speed.
Cruise control set indicator
1) When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”.
2) When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”.
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
appears in the combination meter. The set
speed will be shown on the combination
meter. You can change the displayed unit
by operating the combination meter dis-
play. For details, refer to “Units” F3-46.
Starting and operating/Cruise control
7-46
(333,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
S07AQ02
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
. Press the “CANCEL” button.
. Press the X-MODE switch to activate
the X-MODE (models with X-MODE).
. Depress the brake pedal.
WARNING
Do not place the select lever in the
“N” position while driving. If the
select lever is shifted into the “N”
position, cruise control can be can-
celed but the engine brake will no
longer work. This could result in an
accident.
The cruise control set indicator in the
combination meter disappears when the
cruise control is canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The cruise control set indicator in the
combination meter will automatically ap-
pear at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control
S07AQ03
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Press the cruise control main button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Cruise control
7-47
7
(334,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& To change the cruising speed
S07AQ04
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
S07AQ0405
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”:
The set speed can be increased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “RES” side.
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be increased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side.
! To increase the speed (by accelera-
tor pedal)
S07AQ0402
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed is
set and the vehicle will keep running at that
speed without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
! To decrease the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
S07AQ0406
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
When setting the displayed unit as
“MPH”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/
SET” switch to the “SET” side.
Starting and operating/Cruise control
7-48
(335,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
When setting the displayed unit as
“km/h”:
The set speed can be decreased 1 km/h
each time by pressing the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
S07AQ0404
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without depres-
sing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control indicator
S07AQ05
Refer to “Cruise control indicator” F3-30.
& Cruise control set indicator
S07AQ06
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator” F3-
31.
BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
S07BM
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert.
These functions of BSD/RCTA are the
systems that detect objects and vehicles to
the rear and draw attention to the driver
when changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver in changing lanes or rever-
sing safely by monitoring the rear
and side areas of the vehicle. How-
ever, you cannot rely on this system
alone in assuring the safety during a
lane change or reversing. Overcon-
fidence in this system could result in
an accident and lead to serious
injury or death. Since the system
operation has various limitations,
the flashing or illumination of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may be delayed or it may not operate
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-49
7
(336,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
at all even when a vehicle is present
in a neighboring lane or approach-
ing from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
& System features
S07BM01
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
Spot Detection)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the vehicle
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the
following features.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. and Canada. When driving in
other countries, certification of the
country where the vehicle is driven
must be obtained. For certification in
the U.S. and Canada, refer to “Certifica-
tion for the BSD/RCTA” F7-56.
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
S07BM0101
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of the
presence of vehicles in its blind spot.
. If the system detects a vehicle in its
blind spot, it warns the driver by illuminat-
ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
system warns the driver of dangers by
flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light.
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
S07BM010101
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes.
. If the system detects a vehicle ap-
proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-
ing lanes, it warns the driver of dangers by
illuminating the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s).
. If the driver operates the turn signal
lever in the direction where the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light is illuminating, the
system warns the driver of dangers by
flashing the BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light.
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-50
(337,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
S07BM0103
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
ing from either side while moving back-
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
. An icon appears on the rear view
camera screen (if equipped)
! Limitations of the detectability of
RCTA
S07BM010301
Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,
the RCTA may not operate properly in
angled parking.
Example 1
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
2) Area out of detection range of the radar
sensors
A) Vehicle that may not be detected
B) Parked vehicle
WARNING
An approaching vehicle (A) may not
be detected because the detection
range is limited by the parked vehi-
cle (B). Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
reversing the vehicle.
Example 2
1) The detection range of the radar sensors
C) Vehicle that may be detected
NOTE
The system may detect that a vehicle
(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.
Always be sure to check the surround-
ings with your eyes when reversing the
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-51
7
(338,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& System operation
S07BM02
! Operating conditions
S07BM0201
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of the
following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7
mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The select lever is in the “R” position
(RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator does not appear (except when
reversing).
NOTE
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will stop operating and the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator will appear.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light
. If the BSD/RCTA warning indicator
appears, exercise proper caution. For
details, refer to “BSD/RCTA warning
indicator” F7-55.
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator will appear.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the or-
ientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjust-
ment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-
face around the radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an envir-
onment in which there are no ob-
jects around (such as in a desert) for
a prolonged period of time
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors increases exces-
sively due to long driving on uphill
grades in the summer, etc.
– When the temperature around the
radar sensors becomes extremely
low
– When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle voltage ex-
ceeds the battery voltage rating
The BSD/RCTA will resume operation
once these conditions are corrected,
and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator will
disappear. However, if the BSD/RCTA
OFF indicator appears for a prolonged
period of time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
. The detectability of the radar sen-
sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
tection may be impaired and the system
may not operate properly under the
following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around the
radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
– During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and through
puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the fol-
lowing vehicles and objects.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
destrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-52
(339,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with lower body height such as a
trailer with no cargo and sports
cars)
– Vehicles that are not approaching
your vehicle even though they are in
the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or be-
side your vehicle when reversing)
(The system determines the pre-
sence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving in parallel at al-
most the same speed as your vehi-
cle for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighboring
lane.
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation
system is performing a software up-
date, the RCTA warning icons may not
be displayed on the audio/navigation
screen until the update is complete.
& BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light/warning buzzer
S07BM03
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-
ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light (when there are vehicles in the
neighboring lanes).
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle
is approaching from the left or right side
while your vehicle is reversing)
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
S07BM0301
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted on each side of the outside
mirrors.
The indicator light will illuminate when a
vehicle approaching from behind is de-
tected.
The indicator light will flash to warn the
driver of dangers under the following
conditions.
. While the indicator light is illuminating, if
the turn signal lever is operated toward the
side in which this light turned on
. When reversing the vehicle while the
system detects a vehicle approaching
from either side
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
S07BM030101
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. You may have difficulty seeing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
under the following conditions.
– When sunlight shines directly on
it
– When the headlight beams from a
vehicle traveling behind shines di-
rectly on it
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in the fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-53
7
(340,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
RCTA approach indicator light will not
be reduced. For details about the
illumination brightness control dial,
refer to “Illumination brightness con-
trol” F3-59.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
zer (only when reversing)
S07BM0302
A warning buzzer sounds along with
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the combi-
nation meter display of the combination
meter. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”
F3-46.
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
S07BM0303
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-
boring lane from a lane next to the
neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
are driving on the far side of each lane.
– When several narrowly-spaced ve-
hicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
when making turns at an intersection)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighboring
lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch
– Immediately after the select lever is
shifted to the “R” position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the trunk or cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side (such
as guardrails, tunnels and sidewalls).
. When turning at an intersection in
urban areas, or a multilane intersection,
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
may flash.
. If a building or a wall exists in the
reversing direction, the BSD/RCTA ap-
proach indicator light may flash and the
warning buzzer may sound.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
– When your vehicle drives on the
near side of its lane from the corre-
sponding vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-54
(341,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
away drives on the near side of its lane
from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
S07BM08
! System temporary stops
S07BM0801
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the system is
used at extremely high or low tempera-
tures or when abnormal voltage exists.
Once these conditions are corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop condition and the indicator will dis-
appear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
! System temporary stops due to
reduced radar sensitivity
S07BM0802
1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message due
to reduced radar sensitivity
2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
This display appears when the detectabil-
ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Once
the condition is corrected, the system will
recover from the temporary stop condition
and the indicator will disappear.
If the indicator remains displayed for a
prolonged time, have the system in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer.
& BSD/RCTA warning indicator
S07BM04
! System malfunction
S07BM0403
1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message
2) At first, this message will appear
3) Then this message will appear
4) BSD/RCTA warning indicator
This display appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-55
7
(342,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& BSD/RCTA OFF switch
S07BM05
BSD/RCTA OFF switch
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the combination meter display of the
combination meter, and the BSD/RCTA is
deactivated.
Press the switch again to activate the BSD/
RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
disappears.
NOTE
. In the following cases, press the
BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not oper-
ate properly due to blocked radar
waves.
– When towing a trailer (Outback)
– When a bicycle carrier or other
item is fitted to the rear of the
vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– When running the engine and
making the wheels rotate while
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
remains deactivated the next time the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
& Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
S07BM06
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-56
(343,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Canada-spec. models . Mexico-spec. models
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-57
7
(344,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Handling of radar sensors
S07BM07
Radar sensors (Legacy)
Radar sensors (Outback)
The radar sensors, one on each side of the
vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
CAUTION
To ensure correct operation of the
BSD/RCTA, observe the following
precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface
near the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other
items on the bumper surface near
the radar sensors. For details,
consult your SUBARU dealer.
. Do not modify the bumper near
the radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near
the radar sensors to strong im-
pacts. If a sensor becomes mis-
aligned, a system malfunction
may occur, including the inability
to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong
shock is applied to the bumper,
be sure to contact your SUBARU
dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar
sensors.
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA
7-58
(345,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
Reverse Automatic Braking
System (if equipped)
S07BN
Reverse Automatic Braking is a system
designed to help avoid collisions or reduce
collision damage when reversing the
vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle is detected
in the reversing direction, the system will
notify the driver with a warning sound and
may activate the vehicle’s brakes auto-
matically.
WARNING
. Reverse Automatic Braking is not
a system intended to replace the
driver’s responsibility to check
their surroundings for vehicles or
obstacles to avoid a collision.
. The driver is responsible for driv-
ing safely. Always be sure to
check the surroundings visually
when reversing the vehicle.
. There are some cases in which
the vehicle cannot avoid colli-
sion, because the system opera-
tion has limitations. The warning
sound or automatic braking may
be delayed or may not operate at
all even when an obstacle is
present.
. The system is not designed to
detect people (including chil-
dren), animals or other moving
objects.
. Depending on the vehicle condi-
tion or the surrounding environ-
ment, the sonar sensor’s ability
to detect objects may become
unstable.
NOTE
The Reverse Automatic Braking Sys-
tem records and stores the following
data when automatic braking operates.
It does not record conversations, per-
sonal information or other audio data.
. Distance from the object
. Vehicle speed
. Accelerator pedal operation status
. Brake pedal operation status
. Select lever position
. Outside temperature
. The sensitivity setting of the sonar
sensors
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU may acquire and use the
recorded data for the purpose of vehi-
cle research and development.
SUBARU and third parties contracted
by SUBARU will not disclose or provide
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-59
7
(346,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
the acquired data to any other third
party except under the following con-
ditions.
. The vehicle owner has given his/her
consent.
. The disclosure/provision is based
on a court order or other legally en-
forceable request.
. Data that has been modified so that
the user and vehicle cannot be identi-
fied is provided to a research institution
for statistical processing or similar
purposes.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
System overview
S07BN01
The system detects objects using sonar
sensors installed in the rear bumper.
. If the system determines a possible
collision with an object in the reversing
direction, automatic deceleration will be
activated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-
vate.
. If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-
matic hard braking will be applied and a
continuous beeping sound will activate.
! Detecting range
S07BN0101
1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6
in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width
2) Range that the system cannot detect:
Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind the
rear of the vehicle
3) Detecting range (length): Approximately
5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle
WARNING
If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-
road crossing and you are trying to
escape by reversing through the
crossing gate, the system may re-
cognize the crossing gate as an
obstacle and brake may activate. In
this case, remain calm and either
continue to depress the accelerator
pedal or cancel the system. To
cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-
ing the Reverse Automatic Braking
system operation” F7-66.
& Operating conditions
S07BN02
The Reverse Automatic Braking system
will operate when all of the following
conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position
. The EyeSight warning indicator is off
. The RAB warning indicator is off
. HALT (Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
tem OFF) indicator is off
. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
tem is set to on
. The select lever is in the “R” position
. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9
mph (1.5 to 15 km/h)
CAUTION
. In the following cases, the Re-
verse Automatic braking system
will not operate. Promptly con-
tact a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected.
– The EyeSight warning indica-
tor is illuminated
– The RAB warning indicator is
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-60
(347,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
illuminated
. In the following cases, the Re-
verse Automatic braking system
cannot be operated.
– The
(EyeSight Temporary
Stop indicator: White) is illu-
minated, and the messages
corresponding to the
EyeSight temporary stop are
displayed on the combination
meter display. For details, re-
fer to the Owner’s Manual
supplement for the EyeSight
system.
– The Reverse Automatic Brak-
ing system OFF indicator is
illuminated
. In the following cases, the system
may not be able to properly
detect an obstacle. Promptly con-
tact a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected.
– A sticker, paint, or a chemical
is applied to the sonar sen-
sors or the rear bumper near
the sonar sensor
– The rear bumper is modified
– The rear bumper has been
removed and attached
– The ground clearance is chan-
ged due to the vehicle’s load-
ing condition or modification
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sensor
– The rear bumper is exposed to
strong impact, or the rear
bumper is deformed
. On a steep hill, the system’s
automatic braking ability will be
reduced.
. The system is designed to avoid
collisions by automatic hard
braking when the vehicle’s rever-
sing speed is less than approxi-
mately 3 mph (5 km/h). However,
the system does not guarantee
that the vehicle will be able to
avoid collisions in any situation.
. If the vehicle is reversed at an
extremely slow speed, the dri-
ver’s operation may be priori-
tized. In this case, automatic
braking will not operate.
. The system may not be able to
detect the following objects
– Sharp or thin objects such as
poles, fences and ropes which
may not reflect the sound
wave emitted from the sonar
sensor
– Objects that are too close to
the rear bumper when the
select lever is set to the “R”
position
– Objects with a surface which
may not reflect the sound
wave emitted from the sonar
sensor such as a chain link
fence
. Objects the system is not de-
signed to detect
– Pedestrians
– Moving objects including
moving vehicles
– Objects which absorbs sound
waves such as cloth or snow
– Objects whose surface has a
diagonal angle
– Objects that are low to the
ground such as parking
blocks
– Objects that are high above
the ground such as objects
hanging from above
. When reversing the vehicle, the
system may not be able to prop-
erly detect objects or may cause
a system malfunction if the fol-
lowing conditions exist
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-61
7
(348,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
High frequency sound from other
sources are nearby
– Horn sound from another ve-
hicle
– Engine sound from other ve-
hicles
– Sound of an air brake
– Vehicle detection equipment
or a sonar from another vehi-
cle
– A sound wave with a fre-
quency similar to the vehicle’s
system is transmitted near by
– A vehicle equipped with the
same system is reversing to-
ward your reversing direction
Weather conditions
– Extremely high or extremely
low temperatures in which the
area near the sonar sensor
becomes too hot or too cold
to operate
– The sonar sensors or the rear
bumper near the sonar sen-
sors are exposed to heavy rain
or a significant amount of
water
– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.
– Air is moving rapidly such as
when a strong wind is blowing
Parts attached to the rear bumper
near the sonar sensor
– Commercial electronic parts
(fog light, fender pole, radio
antenna) or commercial at-
tachment parts (trailer hitch,
bicycle carrier, bumper guard)
are attached
– Parts that emit high frequency
sound, such as a horn or
speaker, are attached
Vehicle conditions
– The vehicle is significantly
inclined
– The ground clearance is sig-
nificantly reduced due to the
vehicle’s loading condition,
etc.
– When the sonar sensor is
misaligned due to a collision
or an accident
Surrounding environment
– A cloth banner, flag, hanging
branch or railroad crossing
bars are present in the rever-
sing direction
– When reversing on a gravel or
grassy area
– When reversing in an area
where objects or walls are
adjacent to the vehicle such
as narrow tunnels, narrow
bridges, narrow roads or nar-
row garages
– Wheel track or hole is present
in the ground of the reversing
direction
– When reversing over a drai-
nage cover (grating cover)
– The path of the reversing di-
rection is inclined such as on
a steep uphill
– A curb is present in the rever-
sing direction
– When reversing downhill
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-62
(349,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 5
– The path of the reversing direction is
inclined such as on a steep uphill
– A curb is present in the reversing
direction
– When reversing downhill
– When reversing on an uneven road
. In circumstances such as the following,
it may not be possible to avoid a collision
even when the system operates normally.
– Roads are slippery.
– The tire air pressure is not correct.
– The tires have become worn.
– Tire chains are installed.
– Tires which are not the designated
size are installed.
– Emergency repairs were performed
using a puncture repair kit.
– The suspension was modified.
– Vehicle driving is unstable due to
accident or malfunction.
– The brake warning light is illumi-
nated.
NOTE
. When the 8-inch audio/navigation
system is performing a software up-
date, the Reverse Automatic Braking
System may not display the following
items on the audio/navigation screen
until the update is complete.
– Display Icon on/off Function
– Distance Indicator Image
– Warning Message
. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
tem will operate at vehicle speed be-
tween 1 to 9 mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).
However, stopping the vehicle by auto-
matic hard braking is designed to
operate when the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
& Reverse Automatic Braking
System operation
S07BN03
When Reverse Automatic Braking System
is in operation, an audible warning beeps
will sound in 3 levels to warn the driver of a
potential collision.
While the RAB is operating, a warning
message is displayed on the audio/navi-
gation monitor and the combination meter
display.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-63
7
(350,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Guideline of detecting range
Alert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern
Long proximity (ob-
ject detected)
35 inches (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound
Medium proximity
alert (approaching the
object)
28 to 35 inches (70 to 90
cm)
Yellow Short beeps
Short proximity alert
(approaching closer
to the object)
20 to 28 inches (50 to 70
cm)
Orange Rapid short beeps
Closest proximity
alert (too close to the
object)
20 inches (50 cm) or less Red
Continuous beep
*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.
! Obstacle detected and alert level
S07BN0301
Long proximity alert (object detected)
1) Green: 35 inches (90 cm) or more
Medium proximity alert (approaching the
object)
1) Yellow: 28 to 35 inches (70 to 90 cm)
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-64
(351,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Short proximity alert (approaching the
object closer)
1) Orange: 20 to 28 inches (50 to 70 cm)
Closest proximity alert (too close to the
object)
1) Red: 20 inches (50 cm) or less
When an object is detected in the rever-
sing direction, the range of detected object
will be shown on the audio/navigation
monitor.
A warning alarm will sound and, depend-
ing on the speed, either torque control to
generate engine braking or automatic
braking will be applied.
! Object close behind warning
S07BN0302
Automatic braking warning
1) Warning message
If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,
the system may determine the risk of
collision with the object. In this case, short
warning beeps or continuous warning
beeps will sound and either strong auto-
matic braking or torque control will be
applied to prevent collision.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play.
! When the vehicle is being stopped
by the system
S07BN0303
Depress brake pedal warning
1) Warning message
Make sure to depress the brake pedal
once the vehicle has been stopped by
automatic braking. Until the brake pedal is
depressed, a message will be displayed
on the audio/navigation monitor and the
continuous beep will remain sounding.
At this time, a warning message is also
displayed on the combination meter dis-
play.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-65
7
(352,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! After the vehicle is stopped by the
system
S07BN0304
1) Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF
indicator
After the brake pedal is depressed, the
Reverse Automatic Braking system OFF
indicator will illuminate and the system will
temporarily stop operating. The Reverse
Automatic Braking system OFF indicator
will turn off when the select lever is shifted
to a position other than the “R” position.
The system will operate again the next
time the select lever is shifted to “R”
position.
NOTE
. In the following cases, after the
vehicle has been stopped by the Re-
verse Automatic Braking system, brake
control is released and the electronic
parking brake operates. For details
about releasing the parking brake, refer
to “Electronic parking brake” F7-40.
– When 2 minutes pass after the
vehicle is stopped
– When any door is opened
. The Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
tem may stop operating temporarily in
the following cases and the Reverse
Automatic Braking system OFF indica-
tor will illuminate.
– Ice, snow or mud is adhered to
the sonar sensors or the rear bum-
per near the sonar sensor
– Objects are too close to the rear
bumper when the select lever is set
to the “R” position
– The system detects sounds of a
similar frequency to the RAB sonar
& Canceling the Reverse Auto-
matic Braking system opera-
tion
S07BN04
The Reverse Automatic Braking system
can be temporarily canceled by any of the
following operation.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the brake
pedal is depressed.
. While the vehicle is stopped by the
operation of automatic braking, the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed
continuously (In this case, limited accel-
eration will be canceled and the vehicle will
continue reversing.)
. The select lever is shifted to a position
other than the “R” position.
NOTE
The system will be canceled if the
object is no longer detected.
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-66
(353,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& RAB warning indicator
S07BN07
If the Reverse Automatic Braking System
malfunctions, the above indicator illumi-
nates on the combination meter. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
& Reverse Automatic Braking
system ON/OFF setting
S07BN05
While the select lever is shifted to the “R”
position, the below functions of the Re-
verse Automatic Braking system can be
set by operating the audio/navigation
monitor.
1) ON setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking
2) OFF setting key of Reverse Automatic
Braking
3) ON setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound
4) OFF setting key of the object detection
warning beeping sound
When the ON setting key is shown, the
corresponding setting is ON.
Touch and hold the ON setting key to turn
the setting OFF.
When the OFF setting is shown, the
corresponding setting is OFF.
Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turn
the setting ON.
When the Reverse Automatic Braking
system and/or the object detection warn-
ing beeping sounds are turned OFF, the
following indicator(s) will illuminate.
1) RAB OFF indicator: illuminates when the
Reverse Automatic Braking system is
turned OFF.
2) Sonar audible alarm OFF indicator: illu-
minates when the object detection warn-
ing beeping sound is turned OFF.
Each indicator will turn off when the
corresponding function is turned ON.
– CONTINUED –
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-67
7
(354,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
NOTE
. When the settings cannot be chan-
ged, the ON/OFF setting key will be
grayed out.
. The settings cannot be changed for
approximately 14 seconds after turning
the ignition switch to the “ON” position.
. The ON/OFF setting key may be
greyed out if the Reverse Automatic
Braking system malfunctions, etc. In
this case, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and then turn it
to the “ON” position again. If the setting
cannot be changed even after turning
the ignition switch to the “ON” position
again, consult your SUBARU dealer.
. The settings will be restored as
follows when the select lever is shifted
to the “R” position next time.
– Reverse Automatic Braking sys-
tem settings: default (ON setting)
– Object detection warning beep-
ing sound: the setting selected by
operating the audio/navigation
monitor
Also, the following settings can be chan-
ged by operating the combination meter
display.
. Warning volume
. Sonar audible alarm
For details, refer to “RAB” F3-46.
& Handling of the sonar sen-
sors
S07BN06
The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rear
bumper. To ensure the proper operation of
the Reverse Automatic Braking system,
observe the following precautions.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the sonar sensor or the bumper surface
near the sonar sensors.
. Always keep the sonar sensor and the
rear bumper surface near the sonar
sensors clean.
. Do not modify the rear bumper.
. Do not paint the bumper near the sonar
sensors.
. Do not apply strong impacts to the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensor
becomes misaligned, a system malfunc-
tion may occur, including inability to detect
objects in the reversing direction. If any
strong impact is applied to the rear
bumper, contact a SUBARU dealer to
have the system inspected.
. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.
NOTE
If the sonar sensors require repair or
replacement, or if the area of the rear
bumper near the sonar sensors re-
quires repair, paintwork or replace-
ment, contact your SUBARU dealer for
assistance.
Starting and operating/Reverse Automatic Braking System
7-68
(357,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S08
New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000
miles (1,600 km) ................................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ................................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............... 8-2
Catalytic converter.................................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ............................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ................................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD vehicles................................ 8-5
Off road driving....................................................... 8-6
Legacy................................................................... 8-6
Outback................................................................. 8-6
Winter driving.......................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather ............................... 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads ............................8-10
Corrosion protection............................................. 8-11
Snow tires ............................................................ 8-11
Tire chains............................................................8-12
Rocking the vehicle ..............................................8-12
Loading your vehicle............................................ 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight ........................................ 8-13
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-14
Roof rack (Outback – if equipped)......................... 8-14
Roof rails with integrated crossbars
(Outback – if equipped) ..................................... 8-15
Trailer hitch (Outback – if equipped) .................. 8-19
Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-20
If not towing a trailer ............................................ 8-21
Trailer towing (Legacy) ........................................ 8-22
Trailer towing (Outback)....................................... 8-22
Warranties and maintenance ................................. 8-22
Maximum load limits............................................. 8-22
Trailer Hitches ...................................................... 8-26
Connecting a trailer .............................................. 8-26
Trailer towing tips................................................. 8-28
Driving tips
8
(358,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
New vehicle break-in driving –
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
S08AA
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-
celeration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-
gency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or when brake pads or brake linings
are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
S08AB
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as possi-
ble.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the front and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
. The indication of the ECO gauge shows
a reference for saving fuel. For details,
refer to “ECO gauge” F3-12.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
S08AC
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from entering
the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-
hicle for a long time while the
engine is running. If that is un-
avoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the
vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Driving tips/New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
8-2
(359,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (Legacy) or rear
gate (Outback) closed while driv-
ing to prevent exhaust gas from
entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
S08AD
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
2.5 L models
3.6 L models
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases,
thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline will
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or incomplete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Catalytic converter
8-3
8
(360,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Periodic inspections
S08AE
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
S08AF
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
. Comply with all regulations and require-
ments of each country.
Driving tips/Periodic inspections
8-4
(361,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
S08AG
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), it may lead to
serious mechanical damage to
the drive train of your car and
affect the following factors.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By
shifting power between the front and rear
wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide
added traction during acceleration, and
added engine braking force during decel-
eration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging the
AWD system, you should keep the follow-
ing tips in mind:
. An AWD vehicle is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD vehicles
8-5
8
(362,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling, how-
ever, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
reduce your speed and maintain an ample
distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recommended
tire pressure is provided on the tire
placard, which is located on the door pillar
on the driver’s side.
. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
under hard-driving conditions such as
steep hills or dusty roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of the follow-
ing items than that specified in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”
– Engine oil
– Brake fluid
– Rear differential gear oil
– Continuously variable transmission
fluid
– Front differential gear oil
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
F9-14.
Off road driving
S08AH
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
& Legacy
S08AH03
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature gives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc-
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
under warranty. If you do take your
SUBARU off road, you should review the
common sense precautions in the next
section (applicable to the Outback) for
general guidance. But please keep in mind
that your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are
more limited than those of the Outback.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& Outback
S08AH02
CAUTION
Frequent driving of an AWD model
under hard-driving conditions such
as rough roads or off roads will
necessitate more frequent replace-
ment of the following items than that
specified in the maintenance sche-
dule described in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet.”
. Engine oil
. Brake fluid
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
sense precautions such as those
Driving tips/Off road driving
8-6
(363,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
listed above is not eligible for war-
ranty coverage.
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, you can drive your
SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.
But please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passenger car and is neither
a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-
terrain vehicle. If you do take your
SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
precautions such as those in the following
list should be taken.
! Before driving
S08AH0201
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not piled
higher than the seatbacks. During sudden
stops or jolts, unsecured cargo could be
thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.
Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of
gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
! During driving
S08AH0202
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much more
easily tip over sideways than it can end
over end. Avoid driving straight up or down
slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead,
drive with your fingers and thumbs on the
outside of the rim.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the engine
stops. This could create a fire hazard.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams:
– First, check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the stream bed for
firmness.
– Next, ensure that the bed of the
stream is flat.
– Then, drive slowly and completely
through the stream. The water should
be shallow enough that it does not
reach the vehicle’s undercarriage.
. Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall. Never drive
through rushing water. Regardless of its
depth, it can wash away the ground from
under your tires, resulting in possible loss
of traction and even vehicle rollover.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the select lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
2nd than 1st. Refer to “Selection of manual
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Off road driving
8-7
8
(364,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
mode” F7-27.
! After driving
S08AH0203
. Always check your brakes for effective-
ness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and
stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat that
process several times to dry out the brake
discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is
no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,
etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-
body. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these
materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
Winter driving
S08AI
& Operation during cold weath-
er
S08AI01
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,
a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-
peratures reduce battery capacity. The
battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen, use
hot water to melt the ice, and afterwards
thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it is
diluted, as indicated in the following table.
Washer Fluid Con-
centration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100%
−498F (−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,
check the freezing temperatures in the
table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
Driving tips/Winter driving
8-8
(365,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
S08AI0101
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and driving
dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accu-
mulated under the fenders to avoid making
steering difficult. During severe winter
driving, stop when and where it is safe to
do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
S08AI0102
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. Under either of the following
conditions, icing may develop
on the brake system, which could
cause poor braking action.
– When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads
heavily covered with snow
– When the vehicle has been left
parked during a snowstorm
Check for snow or ice buildup on
the suspension, disc brakes and
brake hoses underneath the ve-
hicle. If there is caked snow or
ice, remove it, being careful not
to damage the disc brakes and
brake hoses and ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the select lever in the “P”
position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent
the vehicle from moving.
! Refueling in cold weather
S08AI0103
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose. When an anti-
freeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for
an extended period, it is best to have the
fuel tank filled to capacity.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Winter driving
8-9
8
(366,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
S08AI02
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of vehi-
cle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy roads. For
information about braking on slippery
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-31 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-33.
! Wiper operation when snowing
S08AI0201
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blade rubbers are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blade
rubbers, use the defroster with the airflow
selection in “
” and the temperature set
for maximum warmth until the wiper blade
rubbers are completely thawed. Refer to
“Climate control” F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-64.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,
use the rear window defogger. Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-64.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “
” and the
temperature set for maximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” F3-62.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop the
vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers. Refer
to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that are
suitable for your vehicle.
Driving tips/Winter driving
8-10
(367,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
S08AI03
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
S08AI04
WARNING
. When replacing or installing win-
ter tire(s), all four tires must be
the same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), it may lead to
serious mechanical damage to
the drive train of your car and
affect the following factors.
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifically for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Winter driving
8-11
8
(368,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Tire chains
S08AI05
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of clear-
ance between the tires and vehicle
body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use of
another type of traction device (such as
spring chains) may be acceptable if use
on your vehicle is recommended by the
device manufacturer, taking into ac-
count tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with a
traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle
S08AI06
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the
wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission in
2nd than 1st.
For information on holding the transmis-
sion in 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
manual mode” F7-27.
Loading your vehicle
S08AJ
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback, in the trunk or
in the cargo area. Doing so may
result in serious injury.
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-12
(369,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure long items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(Legacy) or the extended cargo
area cover (Outback – if
equipped). Such items could
tumble forward in the event of a
sudden stop or a collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
S08AJ01
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-13
8
(370,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
S08AJ02
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross
Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to each
axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehicle
scale, found at a commercial weighing
station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof rack (Outback – if
equipped)
S08AJ09
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rail must be used together
with the roof rack. The roof rail
must never be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint or a danger-
ous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
. When using the roof rack, make
sure that the total weight of the
roof rack, carrying attachments
and cargo does not exceed the
maximum load limit. Overloading
may cause damage to the vehicle
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-14
(371,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
and create a safety hazard.
Cargo can be carried on the roof after
securing the roof rack to the roof. When
installing the roof rack on the roof, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
The maximum load limit of the cargo, roof
rack and carrying attachments must not
exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place the heaviest
load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and
evenly distribute the cargo. Always prop-
erly secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the roof rack
S08AJ0901
When installing any carrying attachments
such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike
carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo
basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s
instructions of the load capacity and make
sure that the attachments are securely
installed. Use only attachments designed
specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-
ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo
is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
& Roof rails with integrated
crossbars (Outback – if
equipped)
S08AJ08
1) Integrated crossbars
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
bars must be used as crossbars
and be used together with the
genuine SUBARU carrying at-
tachment. The bars must never
be used alone to carry cargo.
Otherwise, damage to the roof
or paint or a dangerous road
hazard due to loss of cargo could
result.
. When using the bars as cross-
bars, make sure that the total
weight of the carrying attachment
and cargo does not exceed the
150 lbs (67.5 kg). Overloading
may cause damage to the vehicle
and create a safety hazard.
The bars can be used as crossbars. Cargo
can be carried after setting the bars as
crossbars and installing the genuine
SUBARU carrying attachment.
When you carry cargo on the roof using the
crossbars and a carrying attachment,
never exceed the maximum load limit
explained in the following. You should also
be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to “Loading your vehicle” F8-12. The
maximum load limit of the cargo and
carrying attachment must not exceed the
allowable load limit described in the Own-
er’s Manual of a genuine SUBARU carry-
ing attachment. Place the heaviest load at
the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always properly se-
cure all cargo.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-15
8
(372,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
S08AJ0801
When installing any carrying attachments
such as the load carriers, crossbars, bike
carrier, ski carrier, kayak carrier, cargo
basket, etc., follow the manufacturer’s
instructions of the load capacity and make
sure that the attachments are securely
installed. Use only attachments designed
specifically for the crossbars. Before oper-
ating the vehicle, make sure that the cargo
is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
. Remember that the vehicle’s center
of gravity is altered with the weight of
the load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics. Drive carefully,
avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and
abrupt stops. Crosswind effects will be
increased.
. Restore the bars to the original
position when the bars are not used
as crossbars.
! How to use as crossbars
S08AJ0802
CAUTION
. Do not raise the bar higher than
necessary. The base of the bar
may be damaged.
. Be careful not to contact the bars
while sliding them. Otherwise,
the bars may be scratched or
the latch portions may be da-
maged.
. Do not slide the bar more than
necessary when sliding the bar.
The base of the bar may be
damaged.
. Do not allow the bar to fall on or
contact the roof panel or the
moonroof when sliding the bar.
Otherwise the roof panel may be
dented or the glass of the moon-
roof may be damaged.
1. Pull out the integrated crossbars from
the roof rail holders by pulling up the
covers.
2. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-16
(373,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
3. Install the bars into the holders.
4. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
! How to change the position of the
crossbar
S08AJ080201
WARNING
Carefully read the warning label
attached to the roof rail.
You can change the position of the rear
crossbar. To change the position, perform
the following procedure.
1. Take out the torque wrench from the
under-floor storage compartment.
2. Remove the cap of the roof rail holder
by using the torque wrench.
3. Remove the bolt of the crossbar by
using the torque wrench.
4. Pull out the crossbar from the roof rail
holder by pulling up the cover.
5. Install the crossbar into the other
holder.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-17
8
(374,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
6. Tighten the bolt of the crossbar by
using the torque wrench. The tightening
torque is approximately 8.9 + 2.2 lbf·ft (12
+ 3.0 N·m, 1.2 + 0.3 kgf·m).
7. Install the plastic plug by pushing it into
the hole until it is fully seated.
! How to re-stow bars
S08AJ0803
CAUTION
Do not use the bars as roof rails
when the bars are stowed.
1. Check that the rear crossbar is stowed
in the front side holder.
2. Pull out the crossbars from the roof rail
holders by pulling up the covers.
3. Slide the bars in the direction shown in
the illustration.
4. Install the bars into the holders.
5. Make sure that the latches are fitted
securely.
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
8-18
(375,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Rope hook (attached to the roof rail)
S08AJ0804
Rope hook
CAUTION
. When you use the rope hooks,
always secure the rope at all four
hook points.
. Do not tighten the rope exces-
sively. Otherwise, it may lead to
damage to the vehicle body or
cargo.
. Check that the rope is not loose
before driving the vehicle.
. When you use the rope hooks,
never exceed the maximum load
limit.
Load limit:
Observe the load limit that is indicated on
the rope hook.
Trailer hitch (Outback – if
equipped)
S08AK
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing (Outback)” F8-
22.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg). Be sure your trailer has
safety chains and that each chain
will hold the trailer’s maximum
gross weight. Towing trailers
without safety chains could cre-
ate a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch
due to coupling damage or hitch
ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin and
safety pin for positive locking
placement before towing a trailer.
If the ball mount comes off the
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback – if equipped)
8-19
8
(376,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
hitch receiver, the trailer could
get loose and create a traffic
safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight dis-
tributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
Outback
2,700 lbs
(1,224 kg)
200 lbs
(90 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
towing (Outback)” F8-22.
& Connecting a trailer
S08AK01
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole located
on the hitch receiver tube so that the pin
passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin through the pro-
vided hole on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback – if equipped)
8-20
(377,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains should
cross under the trailer tongue to prevent
the tongue from dropping onto the ground
in case it should disconnect from the hitch
ball. Allow sufficient slack in the chains
taking tight turn situations into account;
however, be careful not to let them drag on
the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any
part of the vehicle other than the
safety chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
& If not towing a trailer
S08AK02
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Outback – if equipped)
8-21
8
(378,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Trailer towing (Legacy)
S08AR
CAUTION
Your vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to be used for trailer tow-
ing. Therefore, never tow a trailer
with your vehicle.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that may result
from trailer towing, from any trailer towing
equipment or from any errors or omissions
in the instructions accompanying such
equipment. SUBARU warranties do not
apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing.
Trailer towing (Outback)
S08AL
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy and air
conditioning system cooling performance.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. Do not use towing equipment
other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions on correct installation and
use provided by SUBARU.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipment, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and maintenance
S08AL01
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused by
trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow
a trailer, more frequent maintenance will
be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.”)
Under no circumstances should a trailer be
towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle with
any new powertrain component (engine,
transmission, differential, wheel bearings,
etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving.
& Maximum load limits
S08AL02
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Legacy)
8-22
(379,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are acceptable.
! Total trailer weight
S08AL0201
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight. The max-
imum total trailer weight is indicated in the
following tables.
3.6 L models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
2.5 L models
Conditions
Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,700 lbs (1,224 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
1,350 lbs (612 kg)
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-23
8
(380,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
S08AL0202
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-
bined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
The GVWR of your vehicle that is set by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located on the driver’s door of your
vehicle.
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
S08AL0203
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that are set by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
S08AL0204
Tongue load
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-24
(381,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing cornering, resulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from 8
to 11 percent of the total trailer weight and
does not exceed the maximum value of
200 lbs (90 kg).
NOTE
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight.
Even in this case, the maximum value is
200 lbs (90 kg).
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the following
illustration. When weighing the tongue
load, be sure to position the towing coupler
at the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper
distribution of the load in the trailer. Never
load the trailer with more weight in the
back than in the front; approximately 60
percent of the trailer load should be in the
front and approximately 40 percent in the
rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly as
possible on both the left and right sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-25
8
(382,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Trailer Hitches
S08AL03
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
& Connecting a trailer
S08AL04
! Trailer brakes
S08AL0401
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-
commended, and must be installed prop-
erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-
form with Federal, state/province and/or
other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
S08AL0402
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
crossing each other under the trailer
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
onto the ground in case the trailer tongue
should disconnect from the hitch ball.
Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking
tight turn situations into account; however,
be careful not to let them drag on the
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-26
(383,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 18
ground.
! Side mirrors
S08AL0403
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
S08AL0404
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehicle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’s
electrical system requires modifications to
the vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase its
capacity and accommodate wiring
changes. To ensure the trailer lights are
connected properly, please consult your
SUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-
tion of the turn signals and the stop lights
each time you connect a trailer to your
vehicle.
! Tires
S08AL0405
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tempor-
ary spare tire is used. The temporary
spare tire is not designed to sustain
the towing load. Use of the tempor-
ary spare tire when towing can result
in failure of the spare tire and/or less
stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” 12-
9 and in “GAS STATION REFERENCE” at
the end of this manual.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service representative or profes-
sional to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire
is firmly secured.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-27
8
(384,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Trailer towing tips
S08AL05
CAUTION
. For models equipped with the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driving support systems, when
towing a trailer, press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not
operate properly due to the
blocked radar waves. For details
about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
F7-56.
. For models equipped with RAB
(Reverse Automatic Braking)
system, consult your SUBARU
dealer for additional information
about towing a trailer.
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer in hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent when compared to normal
operation. You should never
drive at excessive speeds but
always employ extra caution
when towing a trailer. You should
also keep the following tips in
mind.
. When parking on a steep slope
with a trailer attached to your
vehicle, the braking power of the
electronic parking brake may not
be sufficient since strong braking
power is needed.
! Before starting out on a trip
S08AL0501
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only compromise
your safety, but will also negate your
insurance coverage and/or may violate
the state road and traffic acts and regula-
tions.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If any
problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-
tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle
is tipped sharply up at the front and down
at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution are
acceptable.
. Check that the tire pressures are
correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
– the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer’s stop lights
illuminate when the vehicle’s brake
pedal is pressed, and that the trailer’s
turn signal lights flash when the vehi-
cle’s turn signal lever is operated.
– the safety chains are connected
properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
S08AL0502
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss
of control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
erations.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-28
(385,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In a
tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
pace.
. When passing other vehicles, consider-
able distance is required because of the
added weight and length caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer can
be difficult and requires experience. Never
accelerate or steer rapidly, and grip the
bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand.
To reverse around a corner, perform the
following procedure.
1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-
site direction to the way you want to turn.
2. Once the trailer begins to swing
around, straighten the steering wheel.
3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-
tion.
4. Steer the vehicle around to be in line
with the trailer, then straighten the steering
again.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
S08AL0503
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather,
because the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating, pay atten-
tion to the following items.
– CONTINUED –
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-29
8
(386,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
– Temperature gauge
– AT OIL TEMP warning light
. If any of the following conditions occur,
immediately turn off the air conditioner and
stop the vehicle in the nearest safe
location. Refer to “If you park your vehicle
in an emergency” F9-2 and “Engine
overheating” F9-14.
– Temperature gauge needle ap-
proaches the OVERHEAT zone. Refer
to “Temperature gauge” F3-11.
– AT OIL TEMP warning light illumi-
nates. Refer to “AT OIL TEMP warning
light” F3-17.
. Do not use the accelerator pedal to stay
stationary on an uphill slope instead of
using the parking brake or foot brake. That
may cause the transmission fluid to over-
heat.
! Parking on a grade
S08AL0504
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake. You should not park on
a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or slope
cannot be avoided, you should take the
following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Outback)
8-30
(389,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S09
If you park your vehicle in an emergency ............ 9-2
Temporary spare tire .............................................. 9-2
Maintenance tools................................................... 9-3
Legacy................................................................... 9-4
Outback................................................................. 9-5
Flat tires................................................................... 9-5
Changing a flat tire ................................................ 9-5
Storing a flat tire .................................................... 9-9
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .......................................................9-10
TPMS screen ........................................................ 9-11
Jump starting ........................................................ 9-12
How to jump start .................................................9-12
Engine overheating............................................... 9-14
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment ...................................................... 9-14
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ...................................................... 9-14
Towing ................................................................... 9-14
Towing hook and tie-down hooks/holes.................9-15
Using a flat-bed truck............................................9-18
Towing with all wheels on the ground ...................9-18
Electronic parking brake – if the electronic
parking brake cannot be released.................... 9-19
Access key fob – if access key fob does not
operate properly ................................................ 9-19
Locking and unlocking ......................................... 9-19
Switching power status ........................................ 9-20
Starting engine ..................................................... 9-20
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be
opened................................................................ 9-21
Rear gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot
be opened .......................................................... 9-21
Power rear gate – if power rear gate does not
operate properly ................................................ 9-22
When the power rear gate is deactivated............... 9-22
When the rear gate cannot be opened................... 9-23
When the rear gate cannot be closed .................... 9-23
If your vehicle is involved in an accident........... 9-24
To restart the engine when involved in an
accident ............................................................ 9-24
Auto lock/unlock operation when involved in an
accident ............................................................ 9-24
In case of emergency
9
(390,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
If you park your vehicle in an
emergency
S09AA
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pressing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pressing the switch again.
When the hazard warning flasher are
flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator will also flash.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire
S09AB
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in an emergency
9-2
(391,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is stored under
the under-floor storage compartment.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. For the correct tire
pressure, refer to “Tires” F12-9.
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following precautions.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
Maintenance tools
S09AH
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt) (Outback)
. Wheel nut wrench
. Torque wrench (Outback)
CAUTION
The torque wrench is designed to be
used only when changing the posi-
tion of the crossbar. Do not use the
torque wrench in other cases. Other-
wise, the torque wrench may be
deformed.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
9-3
9
(392,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 5
NOTE
To use the jack handle, insert the jack
handle into the hole of the wheel nut
wrench.
& Legacy
S09AH10
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-floor storage compartment”
6-20.)
2) Wheel nut wrench
3) Screwdriver
4) Jack handle
5) Jack
The maintenance tools are stored in the
under-floor storage compartment.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” 9-5.
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
9-4
(393,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 5
& Outback
S09AH11
1) Under-floor storage compartment (Refer
to “Under-floor storage compartment”
6-20.)
2) Jack handle
3) Wheel nut wrench
4) Jack
5) Torque wrench
6) Towing hook (eye bolt)
7) Screwdriver
8) Tire fixing band
9) Tire bag
The maintenance tools are stored in the
under-floor storage compartment.
For the method to use the jack, refer to
“Flat tires” 9-5.
Flat tires
S09AC
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
S09AC01
WARNING
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
serious accident.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-5
9
(394,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out of
the jacking point due to a jolt and
this can result in a serious acci-
dent.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake and shift the
select lever in the “P” (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and
unload all occupants and luggage from the
vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk (Legacy) or the
cargo area (Outback). Refer to “Mainte-
nance tools” F9-3.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
6. Take out the under-floor storage com-
partment and turn the attaching bolt
counterclockwise, then take the spare tire
out.
NOTE
Carefully read “Temporary spare tire”
F9-2 and strictly follow the instruc-
tions.
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry
the wheel cover to remove it.
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-6
(395,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
10. Insert the jack handle into the hole of
the wheel nut wrench.
11. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
12. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-7
9
(396,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts when the spare tire is
installed. This could cause the nuts
to become loose and lead to an
accident.
15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
16. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” F12-9. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
17. Store the flat tire. For details, refer to
“Storing a flat tire” F9-9. Also store the
jack and jack handle in their storage
locations.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-8
(397,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Storing a flat tire
S09AC04
! Storing in the spare tire compart-
ment (Legacy)
S09AC0401
Store the flat tire in the spare tire compart-
ment. Put the spacer and tighten the
attaching bolt firmly.
! Storing with the tire bag (Outback)
S09AC0402
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers, keep
the wheel cover removed.
2. Take out the tire bag and tire fixing
band from the under-floor storage com-
partment. For details, refer to “Outback”
F9-5.
1) Tire bag
3. Place the flat tire in the tire bag.
1) Rear seatback
2) Tire bag
4. Place the tire bag against the rear
seatback.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-9
9
(398,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Convenient tie-down hook
2) Tire fixing band
3) Center of the wheels
5. Pass the tire fixing band through the
center of the wheels and the convenient
tie-down hooks.
6. Fasten the tire fixing band to secure
the tire bag.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
S09AC02
Low tire pressure warning light
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel when
tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-10
(399,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is unable
to monitor all four road wheels.
Contact your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible for tire and
sensor replacement and/or sys-
tem resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
& TPMS screen
S09AC05
This screen displays each tire pressure.
Refer to “Basic screens” F3-39.
In case of emergency/Flat tires
9-11
9
(400,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Jump starting
S09AD
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thor-
oughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get med-
ical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
. Do not jump start unless cables in
suitable condition are available.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
& How to jump start
S09AD01
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
In case of emergency/Jump starting
9-12
(401,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
1) Connect one jumper cable to the positive
(+) terminal on the discharged battery.
2) Connect the other end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster battery.
3) Connect one end of the other cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the booster
battery.
4) Connect the other end of the cable to the
strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near any
moving parts and that the cable clamps are
not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
In case of emergency/Jump starting
9-13
9
(402,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Engine overheating
S09AE
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator
cap until the engine has been shut
off and has fully cooled down. When
the engine is hot, the coolant is
under pressure. Removing the cap
while the engine is still hot could
release a spray of boiling hot cool-
ant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, pull off the road
safely and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
S09AE01
Turn off the engine and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from the
engine compartment
S09AE02
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-15.
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood”
F11-8.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays in the
overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Then
remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator
with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Towing
S09AF
WARNING
Never tow AWD vehicles with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
If towing is necessary, SUBARU recom-
mends it be done by your SUBARU dealer
or a commercial towing service.
In case of emergency/Engine overheating
9-14
(403,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Towing hook and tie-down
hooks/holes
S09AF01
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency.
A towing hook is supplied with Outback
only. Legacy is not supplied with a towing
hook (it is available as an accessory). On
Legacy, the towing access cover is on the
rear bumper only.
SUBARU recommends towing be done
by your SUBARU dealer or a commer-
cial towing service.
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. Never use the tie-down hole clo-
sest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
Front towing hook (Outback):
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the
under-floor storage compartment.
2. Pry off the towing access cover on the
front bumper using a screwdriver, and you
will find a threaded hole for attaching the
towing hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until the threads can no
longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Towing
9-15
9
(404,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
Rear towing hook (Outback):
1. Take out the screwdriver, towing hook,
wheel nut wrench and jack handle from the
under-floor storage compartment.
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its thread can no longer
be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely using
the jack handle and wheel nut wrench.
In case of emergency/Towing
9-16
(405,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the under-floor
storage compartment.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook for
purposes other than towing your
vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
CAUTION
To prevent deformation to the bum-
per and the towing hook, do not
apply excessive load to the towing
hook.
Front tie-down hooks:
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Front Tie-down Hooks are for tying down
the vehicle. They are not for towing.
Rear tie-down holes:
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.
To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Towing
9-17
9
(406,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,
return the plugs to their original places.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
S09AF02
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
2. Apply the parking brake firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and care
must be taken not to pull the chains so
tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
S09AF03
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not run-
ning. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. The traveling speed must be
limited to less than 20 mph (32
km/h) and the traveling distance
to less than 31 miles (50 km). For
greater speeds and distances,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
In case of emergency/Towing
9-18
(407,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Electronic parking brake – if
the electronic parking brake
cannot be released
S09AN
Contact your SUBARU dealer and have
your SUBARU dealer release the electro-
nic parking brake.
Access key fob – if access key
fob does not operate properly
S09AP
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key fob and the push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key fob and the push-
button ignition switch.
The following functions may be inoperable
because of strong radio signals in the
surrounding area or a low battery condition
of the access key fob.
. Locking/unlocking doors including rear
gate
. Switching power status
. Starting engine
In such cases, perform the following
procedure. When the battery of the access
key fob is discharged, replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Replacing battery of access
key fob” F11-50.
& Locking and unlocking
S09AP01
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
While pressing the release button of the
access key fob, take out the emergency
key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
emergency key in the procedure described
in “Locking and unlocking from the out-
side” F2-6.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the emergency key back to the
access key fob.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Electronic parking brake – if the electronic parking brake cannot be released
9-19
9
(408,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Switching power status
S09AP02
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the status of the push-button
ignition switch changes to either of the
following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting engine
S09AP03
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key fob with the
buttons facing you, and touch the push-
button ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key fob and the vehicle is com-
pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At the
same time, the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
depressing the brake pedal, press the
push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does not start even though
the above procedure was followed
precisely, contact your SUBARU dealer.
In case of emergency/Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly
9-20
(409,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the
trunk lid cannot be opened
S09AO
NOTE
If you open the trunk lid with a key while
the alarm system is armed, the alarm
system is triggered and the vehicle’s
horn sounds. In this case, perform any
of the following operations.
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter.
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-29.
The trunk lid can also be opened using the
key.
To open the trunk lid, insert the key into the
key cylinder and turn it clockwise.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The emergency key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is facing
and insert it again.
Rear gate (Outback) – if the
rear gate cannot be opened
S09AU
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by pressing the rear gate opener
button (all models) or using the power rear
gate (if equipped), you can open it from
inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.
– CONTINUED –
In case of emergency/Trunk lid (Legacy) – if the trunk lid cannot be opened
9-21
9
(410,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate lock
release lever with your fingers be-
cause doing so may cause an injury.
Always use a flat-head screwdriver
or a similar tool.
Models without power rear gate
Models with power rear gate
3. Turn the lever to the right position using
a flat-head screwdriver or a similar tool.
Then the rear gate will open.
Power rear gate – if power
rear gate does not operate
properly
S09AQ
& When the power rear gate is
deactivated
S09AQ01
CAUTION
When operating the power rear gate
manually, do not use excessive
force. Doing so may cause a mal-
function.
NOTE
While the power rear gate is temporarily
deactivated, if it is struck by body parts
or objects and sustains a strong im-
pact, the temporary deactivation may
be canceled. The purpose of this is to
absorb the impact of the collision and it
is not a malfunction. In this case, the
rear gate will not open or close auto-
matically.
If the power rear gate senses a malfunc-
tion, an electronic chirp will sound and the
rear gate will stop opening or closing.
In order for the rear gate to open and close
automatically, carry out the following op-
eration. If the rear gate does not open and
In case of emergency/Power rear gate – if power rear gate does not operate properly
9-22
(411,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
close automatically after carrying out this
operation, we recommend that you have
the vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer.
! When the rear gate is closed
S09AQ0101
1. Press and hold the rear gate opener
button. If the rear gate does not open,
perform the procedure described in “Rear
gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be
opened” F9-21.
2. Gently close the rear gate by hand until
it reaches the half-shut position.
3. Operate the power rear gate to confirm
it is recovered.
! When the rear gate is stuck at the
fully open position or does not fully
close
S09AQ0102
If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a
dead battery, etc., while the rear gate is
stopped midway, it can be closed by hand.
1. Gently close the rear gate by hand until
it reaches the half-shut position.
2. Operate the power rear gate to confirm
it is recovered.
& When the rear gate cannot be
opened
S09AQ02
Perform the procedure described in “Rear
gate (Outback) – if the rear gate cannot be
opened” F9-21.
& When the rear gate cannot be
closed
S09AQ03
CAUTION
. On areas which are not flat, such
as hills, do not conduct any of the
following actions. The rear gate
may close suddenly and hit
someone’s head, face or catch
fingers and body parts in it,
resulting in injury.
. Even while conducting the fol-
lowing actions on a flat surface,
be careful not to be injured by
getting caught in or hit by the rear
gate.
. When operating the power rear
gate manually, do not use exces-
sive force. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
. After closing the rear gate by the
following methods, we recom-
mend that you have the vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer.
If the rear gate cannot be closed due to a
dead battery, etc., while the rear gate is
stopped midway, it can be closed by hand.
1. Gently close the rear gate by hand until
it reaches the half-shut position.
2. Operate the power rear gate to confirm
it is recovered.
In case of emergency/Power rear gate – if power rear gate does not operate properly
9-23
9
(412,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
If your vehicle is involved in
an accident
S09AR
& To restart the engine when
involved in an accident
S09AR02
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage.
Perform the following procedures to restart
the engine after the system is activated.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
2. Restart the engine.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
& Auto lock/unlock operation
when involved in an accident
S09AR03
When the auto lock/unlock function is ON,
all the doors will be locked automatically
while driving. For further details, refer to
“Automatic door locking/unlocking” F2-8.
When the vehicle sustains a strong impact
which may trigger the airbags to deploy,
the door locks may be unlocked automa-
tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-
erally, an impact sustained from a rear end
collision does not trigger the airbags to
deploy. However if the impact is strong
enough to deploy the airbags, it can also
trigger the unlocking function.
Under such circumstance, the auto unlock/
lock function will be suspended and the
doors will remain unlocked.
Confirm the safety of the surroundings first
and carry out the following to retrieve the
auto door lock function.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ON” position.
NOTE
Depending on the severity of the im-
pact, the emergency unlocking may not
function.
CAUTION
If the following occur, there may be a
malfunction in the system.
Have the system inspected by a
SUBARU dealer.
. The doors unlock automatically
while driving.
. With all doors shut, the doors
unlock when pressing the lock
side of the power door locking
switch.
. The auto door lock function does
not operate.
In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident
9-24
(415,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S10
Exterior care.......................................................... 10-2
Washing ...............................................................10-2
Waxing and polishing............................................10-3
Cleaning alloy wheels ...........................................10-4
Corrosion protection ............................................ 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion .......................10-4
To help prevent corrosion .....................................10-4
Cleaning the interior............................................. 10-5
Seat fabric............................................................ 10-5
Leather seat materials .......................................... 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery ................................. 10-6
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surface......................... 10-6
Monitor (if equipped) ............................................ 10-6
Appearance care
10
(416,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Exterior care
S10AA
& Washing
S10AA01
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes, drive
the vehicle at a safe speed while
lightly pressing the brake pedal
to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction
of the power steering.
. When washing inner fenders, un-
derbody, bumpers and protrud-
ing objects such as exhaust
pipes and exhaust finishers, be
careful to prevent injuries from
contacting sharp ends.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. Outback: Since your vehicle is
equipped with a rear wiper, auto-
matic car-wash brushes could
become tangled around it, dama-
ging the wiper arm and other
components. Ask the automatic
car-wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or to
fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an
automatic car wash, make sure before-
hand that the car wash is of suitable
type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the
vehicle with hot water and in direct sun-
light.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,
and bird droppings should be washed off
by using a light detergent, as required. If
you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth. Wear rubber gloves and use a hand
brush when washing down underbody,
inner fenders and suspension to effec-
tively remove mud and dirt off.
! Washing the underbody
S10AA0101
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,
floor pan and fenders, and suspension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside
of the fenders with lukewarm or cold water
at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful
effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or sandy
roads, wash the mud and sand off the
underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to mud
Appearance care/Exterior care
10-2
(417,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
and sand buildup. Do not use a sharp-
edged tool to remove caked mud.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
S10AA0102
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are of
the high temperature, high pressure type,
and they can damage or deform the resin
parts such as mouldings, or cause water to
leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
S10AA02
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-
face with a fine-grained compound. Never
polish just the affected area, but include
the surrounding area as well. Always
polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never
use a coarse-grained compound. Coarser
grained compounds have a smaller grain-
size number and could damage the paint.
After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent
polishing with a compound or an incorrect
polishing technique will result in removing
the paint layer and exposing the under-
coat. When in doubt, it is always best to
contact your SUBARU dealer or an auto
paint specialist.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Appearance care/Exterior care
10-3
10
(418,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Cleaning alloy wheels
S10AA04
. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean of
any kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left on
too long, it may be difficult to clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to clean
the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alloy
wheels) with water as soon as possible
when it has been splashed with sea water,
exposed to sea breezes, or driven on
roads treated with salt or other agents.
Corrosion protection
S10AB
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of cor-
rosion
S10AB01
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone chips
or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion
S10AB02
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
Appearance care/Corrosion protection
10-4
(419,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion. Oc-
casionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-
age. In such a garage, corrosion can be
caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into
the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
Cleaning the interior
S10AC
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
S10AC01
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung
cloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. If
the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution
of mild soap and lukewarm water then dry
thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner.
Use the cleaner on a hidden place and
make sure it does not affect the fabric
adversely. Use the cleaner according to its
instructions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather seat materials
S10AC02
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
– CONTINUED –
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
10-5
10
(420,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
S10AC03
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be
used on leather or synthetic interior
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, con-
sole panel, switches, combi-
nation meter, and other plas-
tic surface
S10AC04
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or gasoline, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those solvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents that
contain silicone on the vehicle
audio system, electrical compo-
nents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these parts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Monitor (if equipped)
S10AC05
To clean the audio/navigation monitor,
wipe it with a silicone cloth or with a soft
cloth. If the monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, gasoline, or
any other volatile substance.
Such cleaning fluid could erase
the lettering on the switches at
the bottom of the monitor.
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
10-6
(423,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S11
Maintenance schedule.......................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions ..................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment ...................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment (2.5 L models)................................ 11-5
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running............ 11-5
Maintenance tips................................................... 11-5
Removing and reinstalling clips ............................ 11-5
Engine hood .......................................................... 11-8
Engine compartment overview ............................ 11-9
2.5 L models ......................................................... 11-9
3.6 L models ....................................................... 11-10
Engine oil............................................................. 11-11
Engine oil consumption ...................................... 11-11
Checking the oil level.......................................... 11-11
Changing the oil and oil filter .............................. 11-13
Recommended grade and viscosity ..................... 11-13
Synthetic oil........................................................ 11-13
Cooling system ................................................... 11-14
Cooling fan, hose and connections ..................... 11-14
Engine coolant.................................................... 11-15
Air cleaner element............................................. 11-15
Replacing the air cleaner element........................ 11-16
Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-18
Recommended spark plugs ................................. 11-18
Drive belts ........................................................... 11-18
Continuously variable transmission fluid..........11-19
Front differential gear oil and rear differential
gear oil ..............................................................11-19
Recommended grade and viscosity..................... 11-19
Brake fluid............................................................11-19
Checking the fluid level ...................................... 11-19
Recommended brake fluid .................................. 11-20
Brake booster ......................................................11-21
Brake pedal ..........................................................11-21
Checking the brake pedal free play ..................... 11-21
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance ......... 11-21
Replacement of brake pad..................................11-22
Breaking-in of new brake pads............................ 11-22
Tires and wheels .................................................11-22
Types of tires ..................................................... 11-22
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(if equipped) .................................................... 11-23
Tire inspection.................................................... 11-24
Tire pressures and wear ..................................... 11-25
Wheel balance .................................................... 11-27
Wear indicators .................................................. 11-27
Rotational direction of tires................................. 11-28
Tire rotation........................................................ 11-28
Tire replacement................................................. 11-29
Wheel replacement ............................................. 11-30
Alloy wheels.........................................................11-30
Windshield washer fluid......................................11-31
Maintenance and service
11
(424,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Replacement of wiper blades ............................ 11-32
Windshield wiper blade assembly........................ 11-33
Windshield wiper blade rubber ............................ 11-33
Rear window wiper blade assembly (Outback)..... 11-35
Rear window wiper blade rubber (Outback) ......... 11-35
Battery ................................................................. 11-37
Fuses ................................................................... 11-38
Installation of accessories ................................. 11-40
Replacing bulbs .................................................. 11-40
Headlights (models with LED headlights) ............ 11-40
Headlights (models with halogen headlights)....... 11-40
Front turn signal light ......................................... 11-42
Front fog light (Outback - if equipped)................. 11-42
Rear combination lights...................................... 11-43
Backup light ....................................................... 11-45
License plate light .............................................. 11-46
Dome light.......................................................... 11-48
Map light ............................................................ 11-48
Door step light ................................................... 11-48
Cargo area light (Outback) .................................. 11-48
Trunk light (Legacy)............................................ 11-49
Other bulbs ........................................................ 11-49
Replacing battery ................................................11-49
Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 11-50
Replacing battery of transmitter.......................... 11-51
Maintenance and service
(425,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Maintenance schedule
S11AA
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet.” For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet.”
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet.” For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet.”
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet.”
Maintenance precautions
S11AB
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by
yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this sec-
tion on general maintenance and service
for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-Wheel Drive
vehicle must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule
11-3
11
(426,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit tes-
ter for these wiring. If your SRS
airbag or seatbelt pretensioner
needs service, consult your near-
est SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi-
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
S11AB01
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after the
engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even when
the engine is stopped. If your
body or clothes come into con-
tact with a rotating fan, that could
result in serious injury. To avoid
risk of injury, perform the follow-
ing precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
the access key fob out from
the vehicle.
– Models without push-button
start system:
Always remove the key from
the ignition switch.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system tem-
porarily place that system in the
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
11-4
(427,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
(2.5 L models)
S11AB03
CAUTION
. Do not contact the belt cover
while checking the components
in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause your hand
to slip off the belt cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a burn
or other injury. Note that the oil
filter becomes very hot when the
engine is running and remains
hot for some time after the engine
has stopped.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
S11AB02
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Maintenance tips
S11BI
Some clips and fender linings must be
removed before replacing the air cleaner
elements or specific bulbs.
& Removing and reinstalling
clips
S11BI01
! Removing clips
S11BI0101
There are several types of clips used for
your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
11-5
11
(428,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Type A and D clips
S11BI010107
Type A clips
Type D clips
1. Turn the clips counterclockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver until the center
portion of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the clips with a flat-head
screwdriver using leverage.
! Type B clips
S11BI010102
1. Pull out the center portion of the clip
using a flat-head screwdriver as shown in
the illustration.
2. Pull the protruded center portion to
remove the entire body of the clip.
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
11-6
(429,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Type C clips
S11BI010103
1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using a
Phillips screwdriver until the center portion
of the clip is raised.
2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.
! Reinstalling clips
S11BI0102
Type A clips
Type B clips
Type C clips
Type D clips
Insert the clip without the center portion
first and then push the center portion of the
clip into the hole.
Maintenance and service/Maintenance tips
11-7
11
(430,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Engine hood
S11AC
CAUTION
. When you open the engine hood,
do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
shield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
hood and wiper blades.
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood lock release knob under
the instrument panel.
3. Release the secondary hood lock by
moving the lever between the front grille
and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then throw it down.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always check that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
11-8
(431,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Engine compartment overview
S11AD
& 2.5 L models
S11AD08
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-19)
2) Fuse box (page 11-38)
3) Windshield washer tank (page 11-31)
4) Battery (page 11-37)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-15)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-15)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-13)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
11-9
11
(432,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& 3.6 L models
S11AD17
1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-19)
2) Fuse box (page 11-38)
3) Windshield washer tank (page 11-31)
4) Battery (page 11-37)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-11)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-15)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-15)
8) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-11)
9) Air cleaner case (page 11-15)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
11-10
(433,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Engine oil
S11AE
CAUTION
. If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right
and left, then pull it out. Other-
wise, you may be injured acci-
dentally straining yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine oil consumption
S11AE07
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance in-
tervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When towing a trailer (Outback)
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates and
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil more
frequently. Different drivers in the same
car may experience different results. If
your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
& Checking the oil level
S11AE01
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine. If you check the oil level
just after stopping the engine, wait a few
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan before checking the level.
2.5 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
11-11
11
(434,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
3.6 L models
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
CAUTION
If the level gauge is not pulled out
easily, twist the level gauge right and
left, then pull it out. Otherwise, you
may be injured accidentally strain-
ing yourself.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops.
2.5 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level
3.6 L models
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp
qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. 2.5 L models:
Check the oil levels on both sides of the
level gauge. The engine oil level must be
judged by the lowest of the two levels. If
the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
3.6 L models:
Check the oil level on the gauge. If the oil
level is below the low level mark, add oil so
that the full level is reached.
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
11-12
(435,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
. For 2.5 L models, be careful not to
touch the engine oil filter when
removing the oil filler cap. Doing
so may result in a burn, a pinched
finger, or may cause some other
injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do
not add any additional oil above the full
level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
S11AE02
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Fully trained mechanics are on standby
at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also, used
oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
S11AE03
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
S11AE05
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using syn-
thetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
11-13
11
(436,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Cooling system
S11AF
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator
cap until the engine has been shut
off and has cooled down completely.
Since the coolant is under pressure,
you may suffer serious burns from a
spray of boiling hot coolant when
the cap is removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top off the coolant
for any reason, use only SUBARU
Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
nections
S11AF03
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
1) Normal operating range
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Refer to “Temperature gauge”
F3-11.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-38 and “Fuses and
circuits” F12-10. If the fuse is not blown,
have the cooling system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary,
there may be a leak in the engine cooling
system. It is recommended that the cooling
system and connections be checked for
leaks, damage, or looseness.
Maintenance and service/Cooling system
11-14
(437,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Engine coolant
S11AF02
! Checking the coolant level
S11AF0201
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
S11AF0202
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Air cleaner element
S11AG
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters in-
take air but also stops flames if the
engine backfires. If the air cleaner
element is not installed when the
engine backfires, you could be
burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter
screen. When the element is perforated or
removed, engine wear will be excessive
and engine life shortened.
The air cleaner element is a dry type. It is
unnecessary to clean or wash the element.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
11-15
11
(438,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment
S11AG01
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.” Under
extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
! 2.5 L models
S11AG0111
1) Clip
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case.
3. Remove the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is
extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and
have the air cleaner case cleaned.
4. If you find large foreign objects such as
leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove
the foreign objects.
5. Install a new air cleaner element in the
way the longitudinal side and the trans-
verse side face as shown in the illustration.
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
11-16
(439,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
6. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
! 3.6 L models
S11AG0112
1) Clips
1. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
2. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
CAUTION
If the inside of the air cleaner case is
extremely soiled (for example, by
sand), contact a SUBARU dealer and
have the air cleaner case cleaned.
3. If you find large foreign objects such as
leaves inside the air cleaner case, remove
the foreign objects.
4. Install a new air cleaner element in the
way the longitudinal side and the trans-
verse side face as shown in the illustration.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
11-17
11
(440,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the air
cleaner case (front).
6. Install the removed parts in the reverse
order of removal.
Spark plugs
S11AH
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have the
spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let.”
& Recommended spark plugs
S11AH01
Refer to “Electrical system” F12-9.
Drive belts
S11AI
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.” Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
11-18
(441,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid
S11AY
There is no fluid level gauge. It is un-
necessary to check the continuously vari-
able transmission fluid level. However, if
necessary, consult your SUBARU dealer
for inspection.
Front differential gear oil and
rear differential gear oil
S11BL
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.” Consult
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
S11BL01
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to “Front
differential and rear differential gear oil”
F12-7.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
Brake fluid
S11AO
& Checking the fluid level
S11AO01
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid
11-19
11
(442,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Visually check the brake fluid level of the
reservoir monthly on the even surface.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
Be sure to check the brake fluid level from
the outside of the reservoir. If the fluid level
is below “MIN”, top up brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed contain-
er.
& Recommended brake fluid
S11AO02
Refer to “Fluids” F12-8.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Maintenance and service/Brake fluid
11-20
(443,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Brake booster
S11AQ
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following procedure, have
it checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move slightly
down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
Brake pedal
S11AR
Check the brake pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet.”
& Checking the brake pedal free
play
S11AR01
1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check the
free play with a force of less than 2 lbf (10
N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
& Checking the brake pedal re-
serve distance
S11AR02
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service/Brake booster
11-21
11
(444,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Replacement of brake pad
S11AT
CAUTION
. If you continue to drive despite
the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it
will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replace-
ment.
. It is recommended that you dis-
connect the vehicle battery be-
fore replacing the brake pad.
However, it is dangerous to dis-
connect the vehicle battery. We
recommend that you have your
SUBARU dealer replace the brake
pad.
The disc brakes have audible wear in-
dicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads
S11AT01
When replacing the brake pad, use only
genuine SUBARU parts. After replace-
ment, the new parts must be broken in as
follows:
! Brake pad
S11AT0101
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph
(50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake pedal
lightly. Repeat this five or more times. Also,
apply and release the electronic parking
brake five or more times.
Tires and wheels
S11AV
& Types of tires
S11AV01
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
S11AV0101
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
S11AV0102
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving on
slippery roads such as on snow-covered or
icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
Maintenance and service/Replacement of brake pad
11-22
(445,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
S11AV0103
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
S11AV02
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message by
sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may not
react immediately to a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example, a blow-out caused
by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on
the tire placard. Specifically, inflate them
by an extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: 225/55R17 97V, 225/50R18 95H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front
Rear
308F (−18C)
36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F (−128C)
38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)
−108F (−238C) 41 (280, 2.8)
39 (270, 2.7)
Example:
Tire size: 225/65R17 102H, 225/60R18
100H
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front
Rear
308F (−18C)
38 (260, 2.65) 36 (250, 2.5)
108F (−128C)
40 (275, 2.8) 38 (265, 2.65)
−108F (−238C) 42 (290, 2.95)
41 (280, 2.8)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
goes off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not go off, the
tire pressure monitoring system may not
be functioning normally. In this event, go to
a SUBARU dealer to have the system
inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by an
increase in the outside air temperature or
by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to go off.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-23
11
(446,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a switch
to snow tires) and new TPMS valves are
installed on the newly fitted wheels. Have
this work performed by a SUBARU dealer
following wheel replacement.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead, per-
form the following procedure. Other-
wise an accident involving serious
vehicle damage and serious perso-
nal injury could occur.
1) Keep driving straight ahead while
gradually reducing speed.
2) Slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
S11AV03
Check on a daily basis that the tires
are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer im-
mediately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires
strike curbs or are subjected to
harsh treatment as when the
vehicle is driven on a rough
surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the
naked eye. This type of damage
does not become evident until
time has passed. Try not to drive
over curbs, potholes or on other
rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-24
(447,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
speed down to a walking pace or
less, and approach the curbs as
squarely as possible. Also, make
sure the tires are not pressed
against the curb when you park
the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration
while driving or find it difficult to
steer the vehicle in a straight line,
one of the tires and/or wheels
may be damaged. Drive slowly to
the nearest authorized SUBARU
dealer and have the vehicle in-
spected.
& Tire pressures and wear
S11AV04
Maintaining the correct tire pres-
sures helps to maximize the tires’
service lives and is essential for
good running performance. Check
and, if necessary, adjust the pres-
sure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for
example, during a fuel stop) and
before any long journey.
Tire placard
Check the tire pressures when the
tires are cold. Use a pressure
gauge to adjust the tire pressures
to the values shown on the tire
placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
Driving even a short distance
warms up the tires and increases
the tire pressures. Also, the tire
pressures are affected by the out-
side temperature. It is best to check
tire pressure outdoors before driv-
ing the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire
increases by approximately 4.3
psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm
2
) when the
tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold
when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or
has been driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires
to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from
controllability and ride comfort, and
they cause the tires to wear abnor-
mally.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-25
11
(448,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Correctly inflated tires (tread
worn evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering
is responsive. Rolling resistance is
low, so fuel consumption is also
lower.
. Under inflated tires (tread worn at
shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel
consumption is also higher.
. Over inflated tires (tread worn in
center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road sur-
face bumps and dips, possibly
resulting in vehicle damage.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-26
(449,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with
excessively low tire pressures
can cause the tires to deform
severely and to rapidly be-
come hot. A sharp increase in
temperature could cause tread
separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
& Wheel balance
S11AV05
Each wheel was correctly balanced
when your vehicle was new, but the
wheels will become unbalanced as
the tires become worn during use.
Wheel imbalance causes the steer-
ing wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts
from the vehicle’s straight-line sta-
bility. It can also cause steering and
suspension system problems and
abnormal tire wear. If you suspect
that the wheels are not correctly
balanced, have them checked and
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire
repairs and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel align-
ment causes the tires to wear
on one side and reduces the
vehicle’s running stability.
Contact your SUBARU dealer
if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is de-
signed to hold each wheel at a
certain alignment (relative to the
other wheels and to the road) for
optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
S11AV06
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible
when the depth of the tread grooves
decreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A
tire must be replaced when the
tread wear indicator appears as a
solid band across the tread.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-27
11
(450,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indi-
cator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable
limit and must be replaced
immediately. With a tire in this
condition, driving at high
speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. The resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident
.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread
regularly and replace the tires
before their tread wear indicators
become visible.
& Rotational direction of tires
S11AV11
Example of rotational direction
marked on the sidewall
1) Front
If the tires have specific rotational
direction, refer to the arrow marked
on the side wall.
The arrow should be pointing for-
ward direction when the wheels are
fitted.
& Tire rotation
S11AV07
Vehicles equipped with 4 non-
unidirectional tires
1) Front
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-28
(451,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Vehicles equipped with unidir-
ectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to
wheel. Move the tires to the posi-
tions shown in the illustration each
time they are rotated. For the tire
rotation schedule, refer to the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet.”
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened.
After driving approximately 600
miles (1,000 km), check the wheel
nuts again and retighten any nut
that has become loose.
& Tire replacement
S11AV08
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design; they
cannot be changed arbitrarily. The tires
fitted as standard equipment are optimally
matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and were selected to give the best
possible combination of running perfor-
mance, ride comfort, and service life. It is
essential for every tire to have a size and
construction matching those shown on the
tire placard and to have a speed symbol
and load index matching those shown on
the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at the
same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing
tire(s), all four tires must be the
same for the following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all four tires are not the same in
items (a) to (h), it may lead to
serious mechanical damage to
the drive train of your car and
affect the following factors.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
11-29
11
(452,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
– Ride
– Handling
– Braking
– Speedometer/Odometer cali-
bration
– Clearance between the body
and the tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
S11AV09
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Alloy wheels
S11BM
Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-
maged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels is removed and
replaced for tire rotation or to change a flat,
always check the tightness of the wheel
nuts after driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to
the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for alloy wheels.
Maintenance and service/Alloy wheels
11-30
(453,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Windshield washer fluid
S11AX
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
Windshield washer fluid warning light
When there is only a small amount of
washer fluid remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will appear.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid
as follows.
1) “FULL” mark
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add fluid until it reaches the “FULL” mark
on the tank.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use
an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it is
diluted, as indicated in the following table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F (−128C)
50% −48F (−208C)
100% −498F (−458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer fluid,
check the freezing temperatures in the
table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid
11-31
11
(454,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
Replacement of wiper blades
S11AZ
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer
surface of the windshield (or rear window)
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild
abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the
windshield and wiper blades with clean
water. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. When you wish to raise the pas-
senger-side wiper arm, first raise
the driver-side wiper arm. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position. Other-
wise, the passenger-side wiper
assembly and driver-side wiper
assembly will touch each other,
possibly resulting in scratches.
. When returning the raised wipers
to the original positions, return
the wipers slowly on the wind-
shield by hand. Returning the
wipers from the detached posi-
tions by the spring operation
might change the shape of the
wiper arm or scratch the wind-
shield.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
11-32
(455,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
S11AZ01
NOTE
Do not lower the wiper arm while the
wiper blade assembly is removed.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
First raise the driver’s side wiper arm and
then raise the front passenger’s side wiper
arm.
CAUTION
Hold the wiper arm when replacing
the wiper blade. Holding the wiper
blade, may result in blade deforma-
tion.
1) Open the cover
2) Pull down the wiper blade
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
opening the cover and pulling it down in
the direction shown in the illustration.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it into position. First lower the front
passenger’s side wiper arm and then
lower the driver’s side wiper arm.
& Windshield wiper blade rub-
ber
S11AZ02
1) Support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
support.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
11-33
11
(456,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install
them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the support with the
grooves in the rubber and slide the blade
rubber assembly into the support until it
locks.
1) Claw
2) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the end
of the support between the stoppers on the
rubber as shown. If the rubber is not
retained properly, the wiper blade may
scratch the windshield.
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
11-34
(457,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Rear window wiper blade as-
sembly (Outback)
S11AZ03
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber (Outback)
S11AZ04
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
11-35
11
(458,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and install
them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
11-36
(459,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Battery
S11BA
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when working
near any battery. Never lean over
a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of sparks,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Battery
11-37
11
(460,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
Fuses
S11BB
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating or with material other
than a fuse because serious damage
or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
The other one (main fuse box) is housed in
the engine compartment.
1) Spare fuses
The spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
Maintenance and service/Fuses
11-38
(461,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment. To pick up
the fuse puller, pull it out while pinching the
puller head with your fingers.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the corre-
sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace
it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Maintenance and service/Fuses
11-39
11
(462,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Installation of accessories
S11BD
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle. We recommend that you
install only genuine SUBARU accessories
on your vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
S11BE
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down, Otherwise, there is
the risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-14. For replacement,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Headlights (models with LED
headlights)
S11BE18
The LED headlight warning light illumi-
nates if the LED headlights malfunction.
Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
& Headlights (models with ha-
logen headlights)
S11BE47
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories
11-40
(463,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs.
High beam headlight
1) Electrical connector
Low beam headlight (models with halogen
headlights)
1. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
High beam headlight
Low beam headlight (models with halogen
headlights)
2. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time, use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
4. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-41
11
(464,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Front turn signal light
S11BE03
1. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
pull it out.
2. Pull out the bulb from the socket and
replace the bulb with a new one.
& Front fog light (Outback - if
equipped)
S11BE04
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Remove the clips.
2. Turn over the mud guard.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb with a new one.
6. After replacing the bulb, reattach the
mud guard.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-42
(465,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Rear combination lights
S11BE05
! Legacy
S11BE0501
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Turn the shopping bag hook 90 de-
grees counterclockwise and pull it out.
2. Turn over the trunk trim panel.
1) Rear side marker light
2) Rear turn signal light
3. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise. Use pliers if necessary.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Securely reposition the trunk trim
panel.
7. Reattach the shopping bag hook.
! Outback
S11BE0502
1. Undo the clips. For the method to undo
the clips, refer to “Type C clips” F11-7.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-43
11
(466,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
2. Remove the cover.
3. Remove the upper and lower screws.
4. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly straight rearward and remove it
from the vehicle.
1) Rear turn signal light
2) Rear side marker light
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace it with a new one.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-44
(467,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
8. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
9. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
10. Reinstall the side cover.
& Backup light
S11BE06
! Legacy
S11BE0601
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by remov-
ing the clips indicated in the illustration.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-45
11
(468,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Outback
S11BE0602
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the
light cover as shown in the illustration, and
pry the light cover off from the rear gate
trim.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& License plate light
S11BE07
! Legacy
S11BE0701
NOTE
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the trunk trim lining by remov-
ing the clips indicated in the illustration.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-46
(469,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the trunk trim lining.
! Outback
S11BE0702
1. The license plate light must be pushed
inwards, and then pulled out to be
removed.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
license plate light cover.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-47
11
(470,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Dome light
S11BE08
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically.
3. Pull the bulb straight downward to
remove it.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens.
& Map light
S11BE09
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Door step light
S11BE10
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause a
short circuit. Have the bulb replaced
by your SUBARU dealer.
& Cargo area light (Outback)
S11BE11
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
11-48
(471,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk light (Legacy)
S11BE12
CAUTION
Replacing the bulb could cause
burns since the bulb may be very
hot. Have the bulb replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Other bulbs
S11BE29
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
We recommend that you have the bulbs
replaced by your SUBARU dealer if
necessary.
Replacing battery
S11BK
The access key fob/transmitter battery
may be discharged under the following
conditions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis-
tance
Replace the battery with a new one.
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key fob/transmit-
ter when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the ac-
cess key fob/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace only with the
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
11-49
11
(472,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Batteries shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
should be replaced by a SUBARU deal-
er.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the access key fob/transmitter
functions properly.
& Replacing battery of access
key fob
S11BK01
CAUTION
. When removing or fitting the
access key fob cover, make sure
that the plastic part does not
come off or become misaligned.
. Before replacing the battery, re-
move any static electricity.
Battery: Button battery CR2032 or
equivalent
1) Release button
2) Emergency key
1. Take out the emergency key.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
11-50
(473,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the figure.
5. Attach the cover to the access key fob
by fitting the projections and recesses
together.
& Replacing battery of trans-
mitter
S11BK02
CAUTION
Before replacing the battery, remove
any static electricity.
1. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
– CONTINUED –
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
11-51
11
(474,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
1) Negative (−) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (Type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
ing sure to install the new battery with the
negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “
” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
Maintenance and service/Replacing battery
11-52
(477,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S12
Specifications........................................................ 12-2
Dimensions...........................................................12-2
Engine ..................................................................12-3
Fuel ...................................................................... 12-3
Engine oil .............................................................12-4
Front differential and rear differential gear oil........ 12-7
Fluids ...................................................................12-8
Engine coolant......................................................12-8
Electrical system ..................................................12-9
Tires..................................................................... 12-9
Brake disc ............................................................ 12-9
Fuses and circuits .............................................. 12-10
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ................................................... 12-10
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment ... 12-12
Bulb chart............................................................ 12-14
Safety precautions.............................................. 12-14
Bulb chart .......................................................... 12-15
Vehicle identification .......................................... 12-18
Specifications
12
(478,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Specifications
S12AA
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
S12AA01
in (mm)
Item
Legacy Outback
2.5 L
3.6 L
2.5 L
3.6 L
Drive system
AWD
Transmission type
CVT
Overall length
189.1 (4,802) 189.9 (4,824)
Overall width
72.4 (1,840) 72.4 (1,840)
Overall height
59.0 (1,500)
66.1 (1,680)*
2
65.2 (1,655)*
3
64.0 (1,625)*
4
Wheelbase
108.3 (2,750) 108.1 (2,745)
Tread Front
62.2 (1,580) 61.8 (1,570)
Rear
62.8 (1,595) 62.2 (1,580)
Ground clearance*
1
5.9 (150)
8.7 (220)
*1: Measured with vehicle empty
*2: Models with high profile roof rails
*3: Models with low profile roof rails (U.S.-spec. models)
*4: Models with low profile roof rails (except U.S.-spec. models)
CVT: Continuously variable transmission
AWD: All-Wheel Drive
Specifications/Specifications
12-2
(479,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Engine
S12AA02
Engine model
FB25
(2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
EZ36
(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498) 222 (3,630)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.3 : 1 10.5 : 1
Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4
1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4
& Fuel
S12AA08
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
– CONTINUED –
Specifications/Specifications
12-3
12
(480,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Engine oil
S12AA12
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-11.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
S12AA1201
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
! Alternative engine oil
S12AA1202
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Specifications/Specifications
12-4
(481,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! 2.5 L models
S12AA120204
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
fied with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if you need to add oil. However,
you should change to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
– Adding the oil from low level to
full level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
– CONTINUED –
Specifications/Specifications
12-5
12
(482,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! 3.6 L models
S12AA120205
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
fied with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30
conventional motor oil, however 5W-30
synthetic may be used for optimum
engine performance.
*: If 5W-30 synthetic oil is not available,
10W-30 or 10W-40 conventional oil
may be used if you need to add oil.
However, you should change to 5W-30
synthetic or conventional oil at the next
oil change.
– Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
Specifications/Specifications
12-6
(483,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Front differential and rear differential gear oil
S12AA13
Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5 (75W-90)*
4
2.5 L models: SUBARU Extra MT*
3
or API classification GL-5 (75W-90*
4
)
3.6 L models: API classification GL-5 (75W-90*
3
or 90*
4
)
SAE viscosity No.
and applicable tem-
perature
—
. 75W-90*
. 90
*: Recommended
Oil capacity*
1
2.5 L models: 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
3.6 L models: 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt)
0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil”
F11-19
“Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” F11-19
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of differential gear oil.
*4: You may use this type of differential gear oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from fuel efficiency.
– CONTINUED –
Specifications/Specifications
12-7
12
(484,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Fluids
S12AA10
Fluid
Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Continuously variable transmis-
sion fluid
Consult your SUBARU dealer.
2.5 L models:
· Legacy: 11.9 US qt (11.3 liters, 9.9 Imp qt)
· Outback: 12.4 US qt (11.7 liters, 10.3 Imp qt)
3.6 L models:
13.4 US qt (12.7 liters, 11.2 Imp qt)
“Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-19
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–
“Brake fluid” F11-19
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant
S12AA11
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
2.5 L models 8.2 US qt (7.8 liters, 6.9 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super Coolant
3.6 L models
7.4 US qt (7.0 liters, 6.2 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-14.
Specifications/Specifications
12-8
(485,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Electrical system
S12AA03
Battery type 75D23R
Alternator
2.5 L models: 12 V-150 A
3.6 L models: 12 V-130 A
Spark plugs
2.5 L models SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
3.6 L models
SILFR6C11 (NGK)
& Tires
S12AA05
Item
Legacy Outback
Tire size
225/55R17
97V
225/50R18
95H
225/65R17
102H
225/60R18
100H
Wheel size
17 6 7J
17 6 7 1/2J
18 6 7 1/2J 17 6 7J 18 6 7J
Pressure Front
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary spare tire
Size T155/70 D17 110M T155/80 R17 101M
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
88.5 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12.2 kgf·m)*
1
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nuts
by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,
refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-5.
& Brake disc
S12AA18
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, consult your SUBARU dealer.
Specifications/Specifications
12-9
12
(486,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Fuses and circuits
S12AB
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
S12AB01
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 7.5 A START1
2 20 A 12 V SOCKET
3 7.5 A IG1-1
4 15 A AUDIO NAVI
5 15 A UNIT IG2-2
6 20 A P/W R.LH
7 10 A CIGAR
8 15 A A/C IG
9 7.5 A ACC
10 7.5 A UNIT IG2-1
11 30 A P/W MAIN1
12 7.5 A START2
13 Empty
14 7.5 A UNIT+B
15 7.5 A METER IG
16 20 A P/W R.RH
17 7.5 A MIR
18 7.5 A LAMP IG
19 7.5 A IG1-2
20 10 A SRS AIR BAG
21 20 A P/W PASS1
22 15 A SEAT HTR R
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
12-10
(487,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
23 10 A DRL
24 20 A P/W MAIN2
25 Empty
26 10 A BACK UP
27 15 A WIPER DEICER
28 20 A TRAIL R.FOG
29 20 A P/W PASS2
30 Empty
31 7.5 A SMT
32 15 A SEAT HTR F
33 7.5 A KEY SW
34 7.5 A P/W ALL
35 20 A SUN ROOF
36 Empty
37 7.5 A STOP
38 7.5 A EYE SIGHT
– CONTINUED –
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
12-11
12
(488,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 18
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
S12AB02
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 7.5 A HORN RH
2 7.5 A
HORN LH
3 10 A
ILLUMI
4 10 A TAIL
5 15 A H/L LO RH
6 15 A H/L LO LH
7 10 A H/L HI RH
8 10 A H/L HI LH
9 7.5 A DCM
10 15 A D/L
11 Empty
12 Empty*
1
7.5 A ALT-S*
2
13 20 A FUEL
14 15 A HAZARD
15 30 A IG2
16 7.5 A PU B/UP
17 7.5 A OBD
18 Empty
19 Empty
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
12-12
(489,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
20 20 A*
1
25 A*
2
O2 HTR
21 15 A E/G2
22 15 A ETC
23 15 A E/G1
24 15 A AVCS
25 15 A INJ
26 7.5 A CVT SSR
27 20 A TCU
28 Empty
29 30 A BACKUP
30 7.5 A
Empty*
2
ACTGS*
1
31 25 A
Empty*
2
SUB FAN*
1
32 25 A
Empty*
2
MAIN FAN*
1
33 30 A ABS SOL
34 20 A AUDIO
35 25 A R.DEF
36 15 A BLOWER
37 15 A BLOWER
38 10 A F.FOG RH
39 10 A F.FOG LH
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
40 Empty
41 15 A STRG/H
42 15 A R.WIPER
43 15 A F.WASH
44 30 A F.WIPER
45 Empty
*1: 2.5 L models
*2: 3.6 L models
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
12-13
12
(490,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Bulb chart
S12AC
& Safety precautions
S12AC03
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Specifications/Bulb chart
12-14
(491,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
& Bulb chart
S12AC04
NOTE
Lights A, B, C, D, E, F, and G are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
– CONTINUED –
Specifications/Bulb chart
12-15
12
(492,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlights (models with halogen headlights) 12 V-60 W HB3
Front turn signal lights (models with LED headlights) 12 V-28 W 7444NA
2) Low beam headlights (models with halogen headlights) 12 V-55 W H11
3) Map lights 12 V-8 W
4) Dome light 12 V-8 W
5) Door step lights 12 V-5 W W5W
6) Front turn signal light (models with halogen headlights) 12 V-28 W 7444NA
7) Front fog lights (Outback - if equipped) 12 V-55 W H11
8) Vanity mirror lights 14 V-1.4 W HTU
9) Cargo area lights 12 V-13 W SAE #912
10) Licence plate lights
12 V-5 W W5W
11) Backup lights 12 V-16 W W16W
12)
Rear turn signal lights 12 V-21 W WY21W
13) Rear side marker lights
12 V-5 W W5W
14) Trunk lights 12 V-3.8 W SAE #194
Specifications/Bulb chart
12-16
(493,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Wattage Bulb No.
A)
Low and high beam headlights (models with LED headlights) –
–
B)
Front side marker lights
– –
C)
Front fog lights (Legacy - if equipped) –
–
D)
Parking lights/Daytime running lights –
–
E)
Side turn signal lights (if equipped) –
–
F) High-mounted stop lights – –
G) Tail and stop lights – –
Specifications/Bulb chart
12-17
12
(494,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Vehicle identification
S12AD
1) Emission control label
2) Certification and bar code label
3) Tire inflation pressure label (tire placard)
4) Vehicle identification number plate
5) Model number label
6) Fuel label
7) Air conditioner label
Specifications/Vehicle identification
12-18
(497,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
S13
For U.S.A. .............................................................. 13-2
Tire information..................................................... 13-2
Tire labeling..........................................................13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure ....................13-4
Glossary of tire terminology.................................. 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices ........13-9
Vehicle load limit – how to determine .................. 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities.................................................. 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires............. 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ........... 13-14
Uniform tire quality grading standards............. 13-14
TREADWEAR...................................................... 13-15
TRACTION AA, A, B, C........................................ 13-15
TEMPERATURE A, B, C....................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (USA)......................... 13-16
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
(498,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
For U.S.A.
S13AA
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
S13AB
& Tire labeling
S13AB01
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These marking
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
S13AB0101
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
S13AB010101
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating
Descriptions
S13AB010102
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
13-2
(499,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “91” means 1,356 lbs
(615 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
kg), “89” means 1,279 lbs (580 kg)
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
S13AB0102
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review of
the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufacturer’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
S13AB0103
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
S13AB010301
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inflated. For example, “350 kPa
(51 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
– CONTINUED –
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-3
13
(500,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
! Maximum load rating
S13AB010302
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 615 kg
(1,356 LBS) @ 350 kPa (51 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction type
S13AB010303
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
S13AB010304
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
STER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-
ing (UTQG)
S13AB010305
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-14.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
S13AB02
! Recommended cold tire in-
flation pressure
S13AB0201
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “
Tires” F12-9.
! Vehicle placard
S13AB0202
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Example:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-4
(501,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety conse-
quences of under-inflation
S13AB0203
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper
inflation
S13AB0204
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a short
distance warms up the tires and
increases the tire pressures. Also,
the tire pressures are affected by
the outside temperature. It is best to
check tire pressure outdoors before
driving the vehicle. When a tire
becomes warm, the air inside it
expands, causing the tire pressure
to increase. Be careful not to mis-
takenly release air from a warm tire
to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
S13AB03
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
– CONTINUED –
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-5
13
(502,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corresponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounting on
a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-6
(503,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or pro-
tective bands.
– CONTINUED –
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-7
13
(504,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound
from the cord material in the side-
wall.
. Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index
equal to or greater than 110, com-
pared to the ASTM E-1136 Stan-
dard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as
described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single
Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight
Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered
Surfaces, and which is marked with
an Alpine Symbol “
” on at least
one sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section) and
dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-8
(505,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
S13AB04
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-
dicator becomes visible, the tire is
worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
– CONTINUED –
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-9
13
(506,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Rotating the tires involves switching
the front and rear tires on the right-
hand side of the vehicle and simi-
larly switching the front and rear
tires on the left-hand side of the
vehicle. (Each tire must be kept on
its original side of the vehicle.)
Replace any damaged or unevenly
worn tire at the time of rotation. After
tire rotation, adjust the tire pres-
sures and make sure the wheel nuts
are correctly tightened. For informa-
tion about the tightening torque and
tightening sequence for the wheel
nuts, refer to “
Flat tires” F9-5.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
S13AB05
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s side
B-pillar. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s
placard.
The vehicle placard also shows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue load
of a trailer (if applicable))
For towing capacity information and
weight limits, refer to “
Trailer towing
(Outback)” F8-22.
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con-
figurations
S13AB0501
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-10
(507,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 551 lbs (250
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 800 lbs (363 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 95 lbs (43 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to two), the calculations
are as follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 81 lbs (37
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 81 lbs (37 kg) or more.
Example 2A (Outback only)
CAUTION
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
– CONTINUED –
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-11
13
(508,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-
hicle is 800 lbs (363 kg), which is
indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 363 kg or
800 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 265 lbs (120
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a trailer
weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% of
the trailer weight is applied to the
trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =
176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 172 lbs (78 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B (Outback only)
CAUTION
Legacy: Your vehicle is neither
designed nor intended to be
used for trailer towing. There-
fore, never tow a trailer with
your vehicle.
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-12
(509,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 22 lbs (10
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 22 lbs (10 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
S13AB06
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and on
tires
S13AB07
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear that
– CONTINUED –
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
13-13
13
(510,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
S13AB08
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capa-
city is 650 lbs (1,400 − 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
S13AC
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
13-14
(511,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& TREADWEAR
S13AC02
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& TRACTION AA, A, B, C
S13AC03
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteris-
tics.
& TEMPERATURE A, B, C
S13AC04
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
13-15
13
(512,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 16
Reporting safety defects
(USA)
S13AH
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-
ministration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer,
or Subaru of America, Inc. To
contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.
gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE, West Building, Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.
gov.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (USA)
13-16
(1,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
Index
14
(2,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
14-2 Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-31
Warning light ......................................................... 3-18
Access key ............................................................... 2-10
Warning indicator................................................... 3-25
Accessories ............................................................. 11-40
Accessory power outlet ................................................ 6-9
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-15
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control system............................... 4-5
Manual climate control system .................................. 4-6
Air filtration system .................................................... 4-10
Airflow selection .......................................................... 4-6
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-29
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-22
Alloy wheel .............................................................. 11-30
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-4
Antenna...................................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-31
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-30
Armrest .................................................................... 1-15
Ashtray..................................................................... 6-12
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-17
Auto on/off headlights................................................. 3-49
Sensor ................................................................. 3-50
Vehicle setting ....................................................... 3-48
Auto-dimming mirror................................................... 3-72
Automatic climate control system................................... 4-5
Automatic headlight beam leveler
Warning light ......................................................... 3-31
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR)................................................ 1-17
B
Battery
Drainage prevention function .................................... 2-8
Jump starting......................................................... 9-12
Replacement (access key) .................................... 11-50
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter)........... 7-20
Replacement (transmitter) ..................................... 11-51
Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-37
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-35
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-8
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-30
Booster ....................................................... 7-30, 11-21
Disc...................................................................... 12-9
Fluid ........................................................... 11-19, 12-8
Pad .................................................................... 11-22
Parking ................................................................. 7-40
Pedal .................................................................. 11-21
System ................................................................. 7-30
Brake pedal
Free play............................................................. 11-21
Reserve distance ................................................. 11-21
Brake system............................................................. 7-30
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Braking ..................................................................... 7-29
Tips ...................................................................... 7-29
Breaking-in of new brake pads................................... 11-22
BSD/RCTA ................................................................ 7-49
(3,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer.................... 7-53
OFF indicator ............................... 3-32, 3-42, 7-53, 7-55
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-56
Warning indicator................................... 3-31, 3-42, 7-55
Warning volume..................................................... 3-46
Bulb
Chart.................................................................. 12-14
Replacing ............................................................ 11-40
C
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-16
Light............................................................. 6-3, 11-48
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-20
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-6
Changing
Coolant................................................................ 11-15
Flat tire................................................................... 9-5
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-13
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-16
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light....................................................................... 3-15
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-21
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-21
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-15
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-19
Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-31
Oil level (engine oil) .............................................. 11-11
Child restraint systems................................................ 1-27
Installation of a booster seat.................................... 1-35
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt............................ 1-31
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-36
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-39
Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-34
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-5
Light ..................................................................... 3-48
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Cleaning
Alloy wheels .......................................................... 10-4
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille....................................................... 4-9
Climate control system................................................. 4-3
Automatic ............................................................... 4-5
Manual................................................................... 4-6
Clock ........................................................................ 3-34
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-13
Console ..................................................................... 6-6
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-22
Fluid ........................................................... 11-19, 12-8
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-17
Coolant ........................................................... 11-15, 12-8
Cooling system ........................................................ 11-14
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Crossbars.................................................................. 8-15
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-45
Indicator................................................................ 3-30
Set indicator .......................................................... 3-31
Index 14-3
(4,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
14-4 Index
Cup holder.................................................................. 6-7
Front passenger’s .................................................... 6-7
Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-8
D
Daytime running light system ...................................... 3-56
Defogger .................................................................. 3-64
Defrosting ................................................................... 4-9
Deicer ...................................................................... 3-64
Differential gear oil
Front .......................................................... 11-19, 12-7
Rear........................................................... 11-19, 12-7
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2
Disarming the alarm system........................................ 2-33
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ....................... 7-30
Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-48
Door
Locks ..................................................................... 2-6
Open indicator light ................................................ 3-22
Step light ............................................................. 11-48
Unlock selection function ................................ 2-18, 3-47
Double trip meter ....................................................... 3-10
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-18
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... 3-22
AWD vehicles.......................................................... 8-5
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 7
Drinking ..................................................................... 6
Drugs ........................................................................ 6
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Off road.................................................................. 8-6
Pets.......................................................................... 7
Snowy and icy roads .............................................. 8-10
Tips ......................................................... 7-28, 8-2, 8-5
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 7
Winter.................................................................... 8-8
E
ECO gauge ............................................................... 3-12
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-9
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system .......... 7-31
Warning ................................................................ 3-20
Electronic parking brake.............................................. 7-40
Automatic release function by accelerator pedal ........ 7-42
Hill Holder ............................................................. 7-42
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-21
Warning ....................................................... 3-20, 7-44
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)............................. 1-17
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-9
Coolant ....................................................... 11-15, 12-8
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-8
Low oil level warning indicator ................................. 3-16
Oil .............................................................. 11-11, 12-4
Overheating........................................................... 9-14
Starting & stopping .......................................... 7-9, 7-11
Event data recorder ........................................................ 8
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires..................................................................... 9-5
(5,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-15
Fluid level
Brake .................................................................. 11-19
Continuously variable transmission ......................... 11-19
Fog light
Bulb .......................................................... 11-42, 12-14
Indicator light......................................................... 3-31
Switch .................................................................. 3-59
Front
Differential gear oil....................................... 11-19, 12-7
Seatbelt pretensioners............................................ 1-25
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-42
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-4
Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-8
Memory function ...................................................... 1-6
Power seat.............................................................. 1-5
Reclining ................................................................ 1-4
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) ........................ 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Consumption indicator............................................ 3-39
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-4
Gauge .................................................................. 3-11
Requirements.................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-38
Fuses and circuits.................................................... 12-10
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).............................. 8-14
Glove box ................................................................... 6-6
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-14
H
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat............................................................... 1-8
Rear seat .............................................................. 1-14
Headlight................................................................... 3-49
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-58
Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-14
Control switch ........................................................ 3-48
Flasher ................................................................. 3-56
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-31
Welcome lighting function........................................ 3-50
Heated Steering Wheel system .................................... 3-86
High Beam Assist....................................................... 3-51
High beam assist function ........................................... 3-51
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Warning indicator ................................................... 3-30
High beam assist warning indicator .............................. 3-30
High beam indicator light............................................. 3-30
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-51
Hill descent control ..................................................... 7-37
Indicator................................................................ 3-31
Hill Holder ................................................................. 7-42
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22
Switch................................................................... 7-43
HomeLink
®
........................................................ 3-66, 3-72
Hook
Coat ..................................................................... 6-13
Convenient ............................................................ 6-14
Index 14-5
(6,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
14-6 Index
Convenient tie-down .............................................. 6-20
Shopping bag........................................................ 6-14
Towing and tie-down .............................................. 9-15
Horn......................................................................... 3-86
Hose and connections............................................... 11-14
I
Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-4
Light....................................................................... 3-5
Illumination brightness control ..................................... 3-59
Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-4
Indicator light (security indicator light)....................... 3-29
Indicator light
BSD/RCTA OFF .................................................... 3-32
Cruise control........................................................ 3-30
Cruise control set................................................... 3-31
Door open............................................................. 3-22
Electronic parking brake ......................................... 3-21
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-31
Headlight .............................................................. 3-31
High beam ............................................................ 3-30
High beam assist ................................................... 3-30
Hill descent control ................................................ 3-31
Hill Holder............................................................. 3-22
Immobilizer ........................................................... 3-29
Security ................................................................ 3-29
Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-30
Turn signal............................................................ 3-30
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................ 3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation......................... 3-24
X-MODE............................................................... 3-31
Information display ..................................................... 3-32
Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-65
Interior lights............................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle ................................... 2-39
J
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-5
Jump starting............................................................. 9-12
K
Key............................................................................ 2-3
Number.................................................................. 2-3
Reminder chime...................................................... 3-5
Replacement .......................................................... 2-5
Keyless access with push-button start system ............... 2-10
Disabling keyless access functions........................... 2-19
Locking and unlocking doors ................................... 2-14
Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-16
Opening trunk ........................................................ 2-17
Warning chimes and warning indicator...................... 3-25
When access key does not operate properly ............. 9-19
Keyless entry system.................................................. 2-25
L
LCA.......................................................................... 7-50
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light .................................................... 11-46
Light
Backup ............................................................... 11-45
Cargo area .................................................... 6-3, 11-48
Control switch ........................................................ 3-48
(7,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
Daytime running .................................................... 3-56
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-48
Door step............................................................. 11-48
Front fog..................................................... 3-59, 11-42
Front side marker .................................................. 3-49
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-5
License plate........................................................ 11-46
Map ............................................................. 6-2, 11-48
Rear combination.................................................. 11-43
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-43
Rear turn signal .................................................... 11-43
Trunk................................................................... 11-49
Turn signal......................................... 3-58, 11-42, 11-43
Vanity mirror............................................................ 6-5
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12
Low fuel warning light................................................. 3-22
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-17
Lower and tether anchorage ....................................... 1-36
M
Maintenance
Precautions........................................................... 11-3
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3
Seatbelt ................................................................ 1-24
Tips...................................................................... 11-5
Tools ...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning
light)...................................................................... 3-15
Manual
Climate control system ............................................. 4-6
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................ 7-27
Seat ...................................................................... 1-4
Transmission oil ..................................................... 12-7
Map light ........................................................... 6-2, 11-48
Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-22
Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-8
Mirror defogger .......................................................... 3-64
Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-65
Moonroof................................................................... 2-48
Multi information display.............................................. 3-37
N
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer ................................................................... 3-9
Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Oil filter ................................................................... 11-13
Oil level
Engine ................................................................ 11-11
Warning light ......................................................... 3-16
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-16
Outside
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-64
Mirrors .................................................................. 3-85
Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-33
Overhead console ....................................................... 6-7
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-14
P
Parking ..................................................................... 7-40
Brake.................................................................... 7-40
Index 14-7
(8,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
14-8 Index
Tips...................................................................... 7-45
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3
PIN Code Access ...................................................... 2-22
Pocket........................................................................ 6-7
Power
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-9
Outlets ................................................................... 6-9
Outside mirrors...................................................... 3-85
Rear gate ..................................................... 2-42, 9-22
Seat ....................................................................... 1-5
Steering................................................................ 7-28
Steering warning light............................................. 3-23
Windows............................................................... 2-35
Precautions against vehicle modification............... 1-27, 1-71
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Push-button
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-6
Starting and stopping engine................................... 7-11
R
RAB (Reverse Automatic Braking)
OFF indicator ........................................................ 3-32
ON/OFF setting ..................................................... 7-67
Warning indicator................................................... 3-32
RCTA ....................................................................... 7-51
Rear
Combination lights ................................................ 11-43
Differential gear oil....................................... 11-19, 12-7
Gate..................................................................... 2-41
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-43
Rear seat .................................................................. 1-11
Armrest ................................................................. 1-15
Folding down ......................................................... 1-12
Head restraint adjustment ....................................... 1-14
Reclining ............................................................... 1-11
Rear window
Defogger ............................................................... 3-64
Wiper and washer switch ........................................ 3-63
Wiper blades ....................................................... 11-35
Recommended
Brake fluid............................................................. 12-8
Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-8
Engine oil .............................................................. 12-4
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-7
Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-7
Spark plugs ........................................................... 12-9
Refueling.................................................................... 7-4
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-14
Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-25
Replacement
Brake pad and lining............................................. 11-22
Wiper blades ....................................................... 11-32
Replacing
Access key battery ............................................... 11-50
Air cleaner element .............................................. 11-16
Battery of access key fob ...................................... 11-50
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)......... 2-28
Remote engine start transmitter battery .................... 7-20
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery................. 11-51
Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-40, 12-14
Backup light......................................................... 11-45
(9,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
Cargo area light.................................................... 11-48
Dome light ........................................................... 11-48
Door step light...................................................... 11-48
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-42
Front turn signal light ............................................ 11-42
Halogen headlight................................................. 11-40
Headlight ............................................................. 11-40
LED headlight ...................................................... 11-40
License plate light................................................. 11-46
Map light ............................................................. 11-48
Rear combination light........................................... 11-43
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-43
Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-43
Trunk light............................................................ 11-49
Rocking the vehicle.................................................... 8-12
Roof rack.................................................................. 8-14
Roof rails with integrated cross bars ............................ 8-15
Rope hook ................................................................ 8-19
S
Safety
Precautions when driving............................................. 4
Symbol ...................................................................... 3
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric................................................................... 10-5
Front ...................................................................... 1-2
Heater .................................................................... 1-9
Height adjustment.................................................... 1-4
Memory function ...................................................... 1-6
Power..................................................................... 1-5
Rear ..................................................................... 1-11
Seatbelt ................................................................ 4, 1-16
Fastening .............................................................. 1-17
Maintenance .......................................................... 1-24
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-25
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-16
Warning light and chime.......................................... 3-13
Security
Alarm system......................................................... 2-29
Immobilizer............................................................. 2-4
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-29
Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-34
Select lever
Position indicator.................................................... 3-30
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-25
Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-34
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-14
Snow tires ....................................................... 8-11, 11-23
Snowy and icy roads .................................................. 8-10
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-18, 12-9
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Speedometer .............................................................. 3-9
SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ................ 4, 1-42
SRS airbag system
Monitors ................................................................ 1-69
Servicing ............................................................... 1-70
Warning light ......................................................... 3-14
Starting & stopping engine ................................... 7-9, 7-11
State emission testing (U.S. only).................................. 7-7
Steering Responsive Headlight .................................... 3-57
Index 14-9
(10,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
14-10 Index
Steering wheel
Lock............................................................. 7-11, 7-13
Power................................................................... 7-28
Tilt/telescopic ........................................................ 3-85
Stop light ................................................................ 12-15
Storage compartment................................................... 6-5
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-49
Sun visors................................................................... 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ............... 1-42
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-6
T
Tachometer ............................................................... 3-10
Temperature gauge .................................................... 3-11
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-17
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tether (child restraint system) ............................. 1-36, 1-39
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-15
Tire ................................................................ 11-22, 12-9
Chains.................................................................. 8-12
Inspection ............................................................ 11-24
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-25
Replacement........................................................ 11-29
Rotation............................................................... 11-28
Size and pressure.................................................. 12-9
Types .................................................................. 11-22
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .... 7-38, 9-10, 11-23
Warning light ......................................................... 3-17
Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-22
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-36, 1-39
Towing ...................................................................... 9-14
All wheels on the ground......................................... 9-18
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-18
Hooks ................................................................... 9-15
Weight .................................................................. 8-22
Trailer
Connecting ............................................................ 8-20
Hitch (Outback)............................................. 8-19, 8-26
Towing .................................................................. 8-22
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-28
Trip meter.................................................................. 3-10
Trunk lid........................................................... 2-38, 9-21
Release handle...................................................... 2-39
Trunk light ............................................................... 11-49
Turn signal
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-30
Lever .................................................................... 3-58
U
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-20
USB power supply...................................................... 6-11
V
Valet mode ................................................................ 2-33
Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-5
Vehicle
Capacity weight ..................................................... 8-13
Identification ........................................................ 12-18
Symbols .................................................................... 4
(11,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 2/ 6
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light ................................................. 3-24
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-34
Operation indicator light.......................................... 3-23
System ................................................................. 7-33
Warning light ......................................................... 3-23
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-12
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system........... 3-25
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
Warning light
ABS ..................................................................... 3-18
Access key ........................................................... 3-25
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-22
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-17
Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................ 3-31
Brake system ........................................................ 3-19
BSD/RCTA............................................................ 3-31
Charge ................................................................. 3-16
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-15
Engine low oil level ................................................ 3-16
High beam assist ................................................... 3-30
High Beam Assist warning ...................................... 3-30
Keyless access with push-button start system........... 3-25
LED headlight ....................................................... 3-31
Low fuel................................................................ 3-22
Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-17
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-16
Power steering....................................................... 3-23
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-13
SRS airbag system................................................. 3-14
Steering Responsive Headlight ................................ 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control........................................ 3-23
Windshield washer fluid .......................................... 3-22
Warning volume
BSD/RCTA ............................................................ 3-46
Warranties..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-22
Washing.................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing.................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators........................................................ 11-27
Welcome lighting function............................................ 3-50
Wheel
Alloy ................................................................... 11-30
Balance............................................................... 11-27
Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-9
Replacement ....................................................... 11-30
Windows ................................................................... 2-35
Windshield
Washer fluid ........................................................ 11-31
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-61
Wiper blades ....................................................... 11-33
Wiper deicer .......................................................... 3-64
Winter
Driving ................................................................... 8-8
Tires ........................................................... 8-11, 11-23
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-60
Wiper deicer .............................................................. 3-64
Index 14-11
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Left Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(1,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6
Right Page
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
(2,1)
北米Model "A2550BE-B" EDITED: 2019/ 1/ 11
GAS STATION REFERENCE
S99AA
& Fuel:
S99AA01
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90
RON) or higher.
& Fuel octane rating
S99AA02
! RON
S99AA0201
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
! AKI
S99AA0202
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
& Fuel tank capacity:
S99AA03
18.5 US gal (70 liters, 15.4 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:
S99AA04
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further
details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative
engine oil described as follows.
. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
12-4.
& Engine oil capacity:
S99AA05
2.5 L models: 5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
3.6 L models: 6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.
After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checked
using an oil level gauge. For more details about maintenance
and service, refer to “Engine oil” 11-11.
& Cold tire pressure:
S99AA06
Refer to “Tires” 12-9.
